Infotainment / MM I

Operating Instructions
Introduction
You have decided on the Infotainment/MM! - thank you very much for your
confidence in us.
With your new Audi you are receiving a vehicle with a state-of-the-art system that allows you to
change the vehicle's settings and operate its electronic equipment using a Multi-Media Interface,
called Audi MM/ .

We recommend that you carefully read the Operating Instructions so that you quickly get to know
all of the functions and possibilities that the M Ml offers and are able to make full use of them while
driving.

Please note that these operating instructions a re a supplement to your vehicle Owner's Manual and
should only be used in conjunction with the current Owner's Manual.

Should you have any further questions about the MMI in your vehicle, please ask your authorized
Audi dealer for assistance.

We hope you enjoy driving your Audi!

AUDI AG
Tabl e of cont e nts

Table of contents

About this book ......... . 4 Drives ......................... . 30 CD/AUX .. ... ...... . ..... .. ..... . 63
CD changer . .... .. .. . . .. . . .. . . . 30 In t roduct io n 63
DVD dr ive .................... . 32 Main CD men u ............... .. 66
Genera l Notes regarding CD/DVD Setup CD/Setup MP3 * .......... . 69
operat ion .................... . 33 Audi music interface .......... •. 72
Audi mus ic interface ........... . 35 Setup Interface ......... .... ... . 74
MM I Frequently Asked Questions Adjusting sound sett i ngs ..... . 77
(FAQ) ....... ............. ...... . 41 Setting basic sound characteristics 77
Introduct ion ............... . .. . 41 Digital Signal Process ing (DSP)
Genera l ................... .. . . 41 BOSE® ....................... . 78
Gene ral operation ....... . 7
Navigat ion system ......... .. . . 42 Vo lume settings of other functions 79
Cockpit .... .. ... ... .. . ... ... .... 9
MM I Components .. .. .. ... ... ... 9
Important Notes ................ 10
Notes on Traff ic Sa f ety . . . . . . . . . . 1O
Genera l information ... ... ... .... 10
MM I care instructions .. ... ... .. . 11
MMI Terminal ................... 12
Overview ..................... . 12
RADIO, CD / AUX . . .. . . .. . . 45 NAME, TEL .... . ............ . 81
Switch ing on and off ........... . 12
Basic operating funct ions ....... . 14 RADIO . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . 46 NA M E (directo r y) . . . . ... . . . .. . . . 82
Mult i-function steering wheel .. 19 In t roduct ion .................. . 46 In t rod u ct ion .................. . 82
Contro ls ...................... . 19 Band contro l button (frequency) . 47 Main directory menu ........... . 83
MODE button ....... . .......... . 20 Main radio menu .. ..... . ...... . 48 Import control button ..... . .. . . . 83
Using t h e men u 20 Presets control button ......... . 51 Edit control button ...... . ...... . 84
Activat ing and deactivating the Tun ing con t rol butto n Options con t ro l button . ........ . 88
speech dia log system .......... . 21 (FM/AM range) ..... . ....... .. . . 52 Setup D irectory ............... . 89
Adjust ing the vo lume (~/:a) 22 Se t up Radio (FM/AM r ange) . .. . . . 54 Cell phone package . ... . . . .. . . . 91
Repeating a voice message . .... . 22 Sate lli te Digita l Audio Radio
In t roductio n ................. . . 91
Service ..... . ................. . 56
MMI Display ................. .. . 23 Te lephone operation . ... .. .... .. 96
Tun ing con t rol button
Introduct ion ................... . 23
(Sate lli te Radio) ......... .. .. .. . 58 Main telephone menu .......... . 99
Operating the speller ........... . 25
Setup Satelli t e Radio ....... . .. . 60 Memory control button 103
Operating functions in the aud io
System information ... . .... . .. . 62 Setup Te lephone .. . . ... . . . .. . . . 108
menus ............. ... ........ . 27
 Tabl e of c ont e nts

Calling using the multi -function

steering wheel ................. 112
Introduction ... ... .. .. .. .... .. . 1 12
Calling .. ... ... ... ... .... .. ... . 1 14

CAR, SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . 157

Vehic le settings (CAR) .......... 158

Genera l safety precautions . ... .. 158
Selecting car function ... ... ... .. 158
Version .... ... ... .. .... .... .. .. 1 59
NAV , INFO ...... . .......... . 119
SE T UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Navigation (NAV) . .. . ......... .. 120 Introduct ion .. ... ... ... ... . . . . . 160
Genera l safety precautions ..... . 120 T ime / D ate cont r ol bu tt on . . . . . . . . 161
Introduct ion .. . .. . .. . .. . .... ... 120 Settings control button . ... . . . . . 161
Main navigation menu . . .. .. . . . . 128 Display control button .. ... • . . . . 164
Memory control button ........ . 137 Speech dia l og system .......... 165
Rou t e con t ro l button ........ .. . 141 Introduct ion .. ... ... ... ... ... . . 165
Map contro l button . .. ......... . 144 Using the speech dia log system . . 166
Nav -lnfo contro l button .. ...... . 147 Dialog -guided help functions .. . . 173
Setup Navigation ............. . . 147 Examp les of t he speech d ia log
Information (INFO) . . ..... . .... . 15 4 system ... ..... .. ... ... ... ... . . 180
Introduction .. . .. . . .. ........ . . 154 Setup for t he speech dialog system 184
Main information menu ... .. .... 1 54

Alphabetical index . ... .. 187

About thi s b o ok

About this book

This user's manua l contains important informat ion, tips, sugges -
tions, and warnings for the use of your vehicle . & WARNING
Make sure that th is user's manual is always located in the vehicle. Text with thi s symbol contain s important information on safety
This is espec ially important if you allow other people to drive the and how to reduce the risk of personal injury or death .
vehic le, or if you sell it.
This user's manual descr ibes the equipmen t range specified for this
model at the editorial deadline date. Some of the equipment
0 Note
Text with this symbol draws your attention to potential sources of
descr ibed here will on ly be availab le at a later date, or only in
damage t o you r veh icle.
specific markets.

~
Some sect ions in th is user's manual do not apply to all vehicles . In
that case, the range of applicability is given at the beginn ing of the For the sake of the environment
section, e. g. "Applies to vehicles: with te lephone". In addition, Text with this symbol contains informatio n about the environ ment
optional equipment is ind icated by an asterisk"*" . and how you can help protect it.
The details in the illust rat ions may be different from those in your
veh icle, and are intended t o be viewed as a basic guide. (I) Tips
You wil l find a t able of content s at the beginning of this book, which Text with this symbol contains special tips and other information
displays all topics described in this manua l in order of appearance. about getting the most out of your vehicle and its features . •
You wi ll find an alphabetical index at the end of this book .
All direct ions, such as "left", "right", "front", "back", are relative to
the d irection of travel.
* opt iona l equipment
... This section continues on the next page.
• Indicates the end of a section .
® Registered trademarks are identified with a ®. If this symbol is
missing, it is no guarantee that t he terms can be used freely .
=:> &Cross-reference to a "WARNI NG!" within a section. For indi -
cation with a page number, the corresponding "WARNING!" can be
found outside of t he sect ion.
 About this book

General operation RADIO, CD/AUX NAME, TEL NAV, INFO CAR.SETUP

General operation
 Cockpit

C"')

Fig. 1 Cockpit: Multi-function steering wheel, displays, and MMI Terminal in the center console
 Cockpit

Cockpit

MMI Components
This overview should help you to quickly familiarize your-
self with the displays and controls in the cockpit.
G) Multi -function steering wheel * => page 19
0 Instrument cluster display
- Radio (FM'fAM) => page 50
- CD => page 68
- Audi music int erface* => page 74
- Telephone* (cell phone package)=> page 112
- Navigation* => page 124
© MMI Display => page 23
© Button for switching the MMI Display on/off=> page 13
© ON/OFF knob
- Switching MMI system on/off => pag e 13
- Volume adjustment=> page 14
- Mute / Pause function => page 14
© MMI Terminal => page 12

[i] Tips
Please note that these operating instructions describe only the MMI
and its components . Additional information for the operation of
your vehicle is available only in the vehicle Owner's Manual. You will
also find care information about the MMI screen there. •

General operation • •
Important Notes

Important Notes

Notes on Traffic Safety General information

To ensure driving safety, settings in the MM/ must only be Settings in the MM/ system should not be performed
performed when the vehicle is parked. while you are driving the vehicle.
The MMI offers numerous entertainment, communication and navi -
gation options . In addition, you can display important information
regarding the vehicle's operating state, and you can adjust and save
various vehicle settings.
Adjust vehicle and => page 158 setup settings => page 160 only
when the vehicle is parked. Avoid operating the MMI while driving
in order to keep your eyes on the road. While driving, use the
controls on the multi -function steering wheel* => page 19.
Fig. 2 MMI Display:
Warning
& WARNING
• Pay attention first and foremost to your driving! As the driver After the ignition is switched on, a warning message
of the vehicle, you have total responsibility for operating the ::::;,fig. 2 will appear when a speller ::::;,page 25 is used for the
vehicle safely. Therefore, when using the Navigation system func- first time while driving.
tions, make certain that you always have complete control of your
vehicle!
- Please read the warning message carefully and follow
the instructions.
• Traffic today requires your full and continuous concentration.
As the driver, you bear complete responsibility for safety in traffic. - Select Accept by pressing the control knob once you
Therefore, to ensure driving safety, settings in the MMI must be have read the warning message.
performed only when the vehicle is parked.
• The volume controls on the audio system should be selected to Always observe this message to avoid jeopardizing your own safety
ensure that outside signals, such as police and fire truck sirens and that of others.
can always be heard - danger of accident! Perform MMI settings only when the vehicle is parked in order to
• Be sure to follow applicable laws regarding speaking on the devote your full attention to driving safety.
telephone* while driving a vehicle. • Once you have confirmed the warning message, you may continue
to adjust the MMI. ~
 Important Notes

& WARNING
Traffic today requires your full and continuous concentration. As
the driver, you bear complete responsibility for safety in traffi c. To
avoid accidents , never operate the MMI while driving! •

MMI care instructions

Both the MM/ Terminal and the MM/ Displ ay require
regular care.
For instruct io ns on clean in g and ca rin g for th e system com po nent s,
refer to the vehicle Owner 's Manual. •

General operation • •
MMI Terminal

MMI Terminal

Overview 0 Control knob ~ page 16

© Control buttons ~ page 15
All functions of the MM! are operated via the terminal on @ !RETURN] button ~ page 17
the center console. © Arrow buttons ~ page 17
@ ON/OFF knob
Switching the MMI Syst em on and off ~ page 12
- Adjusting volume ~ page 14
- Mute / Pause function ~ page 14

[i ] Tips
In principle you only need to take note of the buttons described,
along with their main functions . You will be led t hrough the oper-
ating procedures with the help of the MMI menus, which are mostly
self-explanatory . •

Switching on and off

Automatic switching on and off

Fig. 3 MMI Terminal in the center console
The MMI switches on automatically after you turn on the ignition.
0 Function buttons~ page 15 When y o u remove your key from the ignition lock, th e MM I wi II auto-
- INAV] button ~ page 120 matically switch off .
- !INFO] button ~ page 154
What happens when it is switched on?
- [CARI button ~ page 758
The MMI Display switches on automatically. The menu for the last
- !SETUP] button~ page 160 selected main funct ion appears in the display. The last selected
- IFM TA M I button ~ page 46 audio source is switched on automatically.
- ICD /AUX] button ~ page 63 What happens when it is switched off?
- !NAM E] button ~ page 82 The MMI Display switches off automatically . Settings that have been
- !TEL ] button ~ page 96 made are retained . •
 MMI T er m ina l

Switching MMI System on and off Switching the display on and off
If the MM/ was sw i tched off manually, it can only be If desired, the MM/ Display can be switched on and off.
switched on again manually with the ON/OFF knob.
- Press the ON/OFF knob~ page 72, fig. 3 © briefly to
switch t he MM I on.
- Press the ON/OFF knob~ page 72, f ig. 3 © and ho ld it
down to switc h the MMI off.

If you sw itch on the MMI with the ignition key removed, the system
is available for 10 minutes. If you press a button (function button,
control button or control knob) before this time is up, the system is
available for another 10 minutes. ----------------
If you switch off the MM I manua lly, the MMI graphic is displayed -- ~
-- - --
-r -- - ~
--- -
--
Fig. 4 Coc kpit :
Swi t ch ing t he d is play
=> fig. 4. - -------- on and off

If the MM I was switched off manually, it is not switched on automat -

ically the next time the igni t ion is turned on . The MM I Display is switched on automatically when the MMI is
switched on. When the MMI is switched off, it is automatical ly
switched off again .
0 Not e Pressing the button G) => fig. 4 the MMI Display can be switched on
The MM I System should not be left on for long periods of t ime when and off manua lly. •
the engine is off and the ignition "on" to avoid battery drain . If the
battery charge is insufficient, the MMI Display wil l inform you that
the system will turn off soon. The system w ill then go into MMI OFF
stat us.

[i ]Tips
• You can also activate the M M I manual ly by pressing the [(ol]
button=> page 13 or a function button=> page 15.
• When you quickly press the ON/OFF knob, the mut e switch
=> page 14 will be activated or deactivated with an active aud io
source. •

General operation
MMI Terminal

Basic operating functions Mute / Pause function

Adjusting volume

Fig. 6 MMI Terminal:

ON/OFF knob, acti-
vating/deactivating
Mute / Pause function
Fig. 5 MMI Terminal:
ON/OFF knob ·
adjusting volume

Volume can be adjusted continuously by turning the ON/OFF knob.

The volume setting will be stored automatically.
If the volume is too high when the radio is turned on, it wil l be
reduced to a level set by the factory . If the volume is too low when
th e radio is turned on, it is automatically raised to a level stored by
Fig. 7 MMI Display:
the factory. Mute symbol !mute is
For a portable player*, connected by a 3.5 mm stereo jack adapter active)
cable, the volume is not automatically raised or lowered~ page 35.
Activating Mute/Pause function

[i J Tips - Press the ON/OFF knob br iefly ~ fig. 6, or

If your vehicle is equipped with the multi-function steering wheel*, - Turn the ON/OFF knob counter-c lockwise until the mute
you can also adjust the volume with the right menu thumb wheel on symbol G) ~ fig. 7 appears in the MMI status bar.
the multi-function steering wheel~ page 22. •
Deactivating Mute / Pause function
- Press the ON/OFF knob br iefly~ fig. 6, or

- Rota t e the ON/OFF thumbwheel clockwise .
The Mute/Pause function switches an active audio source to mute,
and stops an active Infotainment drive. The title bar will display
Pause after you have stopped the drive .
In the status bar (bottom line in the MMI Display) the activated mute
function is shown as a symbol (D => page 14, fig. 7.
If you have activated the Mute/Pause function by quick ly pressing
the ON/OFF button, the Mute/Pause function will still be active after
you have turned the MMI on.
If you have activated the Mute/Pause function by turn ing the
ON/OFF thumbwheel, volume wil l be at the lowest setting when the
Mute/Pause function is turned on again. •
Function buttons
The labelled function bu ttons allow you to switch quickly
from one main function to another.
Fig. 8 MMI Terminal:
Function butt ons
- Press a funct ion button=> fig . 8 t o reach the desire d m ain
f un cti on.
General operation
MMI T er m in a l
If the MMI is switched on, all main functions are active. When you
press a function button, either the main menu or a submenu
assigned to this main function is disp layed. The activated function
button is illuminated for better navigation .
If a submenu is displayed after pressing a function button, t he
History function=> page 18 is active. If you press the corresponding
function button within this main function again, you wil l jump to the
pertinent main menu=> page 18, "Home function".
However, if route planning with stopovers was activated in Naviga -
tion*, the Home function canno t be used to reach the main naviga -
tion menu. If you want to switch to the main navigation menu in this
instance, select the control button with the Route f unc t ion and acti -
vate Route w ithout stopo ver by rotating and pressing the control
knob.
Individual main f unctions cannot be deactivated by pressing a
previously activated function button again.
The setup function works in conjunction with an already activated
function button. This opens special settings belonging to the main
fu nction just se lected .
By pressing the !SETUP] button again, you can leave the setup menu
=> page 160. •
MMI Terminal

Control knob The speller => page 25 and the control wheel =>page 27 are also
operated using the control knob . •
You can make a selection in the MM/ Display by turning
and pressing the control knob.
Control buttons
The control buttons are logically assigned to the corners
of the screen.

Fig. 9 MMI Terminal :

Control knob
Fig. 10 MMI Terminal:

Rotation function alllie+ Assignment of control

Rotate the control knob =:>fig. 9 to select a menu item in
the MMI Display .
Rotate the control knob clockwise or counter-clockwise
to move the cursor up or down.
buttons and button
symbols to the screen
corners.
The functions of the control buttons depend on the main function
currently being performed . The actual functions of the control
buttons can be found on the four corners of the MMI screen.

Pressing function The four control buttons organized around the control knob
©
=> page 12, fig. 3 are ordered to correspond to the switch
- Press the control knob =:>fig. 9 to confirm the selection symbols in the screen corners : The screen corner on the top right
or entry. corresponds to the top right control button => fig . 10.

Selection of individual menu items can only be performed using the When you press a control button, a new menu group is displayed
control knob . which is assigned thematically to the particular main function.

If an arrow is visible in the lower or upper MMI Display corner, addi - To make orientation easier, the activated control button is illumi -
tional menu items can be called up by continuing to rotate the knob nated and the corresponding corner of the screen is highlighted in
=> page 24. color . •
 MMI Terminal

Return button Arrow buttons

Fig. 11 MMI Terminal: Fig. 12 MMI Terminal:

Return button Arrow buttons

By pressing the IRETURN Ibutton you will jump back one level in the Depending on the operating mode, the following functions are
menu hierarchy within a main function. carried out with the arrow buttons:
A selection that has not been confirmed by pressing the control Main radio function is active
knob will be cancelled.
G Go to next station
The IRETURN I button is available in every menu application.
0 Go to previous station
In the main telephone* menu the number in the speller entry field
can be deleted by pressing the IRETURN I button. Main CD or Audi music interface* function is active
By pressing the G button, the next CD track or the next track of a
connected iPod* is called up. If the button is held down, fast forward
[i J Tips is activated.
If you activate the function button within a main function
You can jump back to the previous track by pressing the@ button
=> page 15, the system will automatically jump to the main menu of
within the first 10 seconds of play time . After 10 seconds it jumps to
that main function. Please note => page 18, "Home function". •
the start of the track . If the button is held down, fast rewind is
activated . •

General operation
MMI Terminal

History function MMI System Reset

The system recalls the previous settings. The MM/ system reset provides immediate help when the
MM/ System has crashed.
When a function button is pressed, the system will switch to the
most recently accessed menu level for the specific main function .
This includes any sublevels that were opened. This excludes setup
menus .
An example: You are currently on the Tuning radio menu and switch
to the navigation* menu by pushing the [NAV] button. If you press
the IFMTAM ] button at this time, you will not jump to the main radio
menu, but directly to the Tuning radio menu .
The history memory is erased when the system moves into standby
mode. •

Home function
It is easy to move to the main menu of a main function.
-- Fig. 13 MMI Terminal:
Button combination
when resetting system

If you activate the function button within a main function, the The following procedure (key combination) will restart your
system will automatically jump to the main menu of that main func- MMI System and will allow the return of the system to
tion. complete functionality.
However, if route planning with stopovers was activated in Naviga- - Hold down the [SETUP] function button (D, the control
tion*, the Home function cannot be used to reach the main naviga -
tion menu:::::, page 126, fig . 148. If you want to switch to the main
knob 0 and the top right control button 0
simulta -
neously.
navigation menu in this instance, select the control button with the
Route function and activate Route without stopover by rotating and - Release the buttons again. The MMI System switches off
pressing the control knob. • and then begins with a Restart.

Even in a highly developed system with sophisticated design and

functionality, there is a possibility that the system will suddenly
stop reacting to entries or operations.

[i ] Tips
If problems arise during system reset , please consult your autho-
rized Audi dealer. •
 Multi-fun c ti o n st ee r ing wh ee l

Multi-function steering wheel

App lies to vehicles: wit h m ulti -fu nct ion steering wh eel
-Butt o n / -
Controls Thumb-
Function
Application
description
The multi -function steering wheel enables quick and easy wheel
operation of selected systems on the MM!. ® Press the !MODE i Menu selection between trip com -
button . puter/navigation*, audio sources
and telephone* function
~ page 20 .

@ Ro ll the left Select a menu item ~ page 20.

th um bw h eel.

@ Press the left Selection in chosen menu item.

thumbwheel.
Press the Talk But- Act ivate/Deact ivate t he sp eech
© dia log system* ~ page 27.
t on [ ¢;<,
1-
Roll the right Volume adjustment~ page 22.
Fig. 14 M ult i-function ® thumbwheel.
stee ring w heel:
Controls Press the right Repeat t he last navigation*
® thumbwheel. announcem ent ~ page 22.
As a supplement to the readout in the MMI Disp lay, selected MMI
functions are also shown in the instrument cluster display. These
functions are operated using the multi -function steering wheel. [i ] Tips
In addition, you can switch the speech dia log system* on and off • The volume can also be adjusted using the ON/OFF knob on the
from the multi-function steering wheel, change the volume and , if MMI Terminal ~ page 14.
necessary, have the last Navigation system* voice message played • If systems are not available in the vehicle, the button on the
back again . st eering whe el assigned to tha t system has no func t ion. •
Description of functions and possible uses are provided in the table
w ith references to the related chapter.

General operation
Mu lti-fun c t ion st eeri ng wh ee l

Applie s to vehicl es: w ith mu lti-fun ct io n steer ing w hee l App lies to vehicle s: w ith m ulti-fu ncti on steer ing w heel

MODE button Using the menu

Functions of the MM/ can be called up one after another
using the [ MODE] button on the multi-function steering
wheel .
- Press the !MODE] button ® => fig. 15 to selec t a menu. @
By pressing th e [MODE] button several tim es, dep ending on equip -
ment , you wi ll go to t he following :
• the t rip computer or navigation * d isp lay
• Radio (station list) => page 50, CD (track list) => page 68 or the
track list for an iPod* => page 74 connected to the Audi music int er- Fig. 15 Illustr ati on of
the mult i-funct ion
f ace* . ste ering w heel: Left
• Telephone menu* => pag e 112 operat ing unit

If the instrument cluster displays Navigation * , you can also get to

the prog ram or tr ack list of t he audio source that is cur rently active
by turning the left menu thumbwhee l.

[i ) Tips
Operating procedur es for systems shown in t he instrument cluste r
display cannot be performed via the MM I Terminal. •

Fig. 16 Instrument
cluste r d is play : Phon e
boo k

Opening menus
Keep pressing t he [ MODE] button ® => fig . 15 unt il the
desired menu appears. _,,,
 Multi-fun c ti o n st ee r ing wh ee l

S e le cti n g m e nu it e m s Ap plies to vehic les: with mu lti-funct ion steering whee l and speech dia log system

- Roll the t humbw heel @ => page 20, fig. 15 t o select a Activating and deactivating the
me nu item . speech dialog system [¢'.<c)
- Press the left thumbwhee l @ to select the desired menu The speech dialog system is activated and deactivated
optio n. using the Talk Button.
- Press the (MODE) button to leave the menu.

By repeatedly pressing the [ MODE] button @ , you move from one

menu display to the next.

[i J T ips
A comprehensive description of the functions of the individual
menu items can be found in each chapter . •

Fig. 17 Illustr ati on of

t he mu lti-function
stee ring w heel: Talk
Button

Acti v ating th e sp e e c h dialog syst e m

- Briefly press the Talk Button [¢'.<<]
@ on the multi-function
steering wheel, t he chime <Beep> sounds - t he speech
dialog system is ready .
- Say the desired command.

De ac tivating the sp ee ch di a log system

- Press the Talk Button [¢'.<<)
@ until t he announcement
<Cancel> is heard, or
- Say the command CANCEL.

The speech dialog system is activated by pressing the Talk Button

(¢'.<<
] @ . As soon as the system is ready for dialog, it is confirmed by .,

General operation
Multi-function steering wheel

a chime <Beep>. Then the desired functions can be opened by Activating/Deactivating the Mute/Pause
means of vo ice command. Function
- To activate the Mute/Pause function, roll the right menu
[ i ) Tips thumbwheel downward until the mute symbol G)
You can find a detailed description in the chapter ~ page 165, => page 14, fig. 7 appears on the MMI status bar. If the
"Speech dialog system". This button is inoperative on vehicles drive is active , it will be stopped . Pause will also be
wi t hou t spe ech dialog system . • displayed in the MMI title bar.
- To deactivate the Mute/Pause function, roll the right
Appl ies to vehicles : with multi-function steering whee l menu thumbwheel on the multifunction steering wheel
Adjusting the volume (~/ ~ ) upward. The drive that was stopped will start playing
again. •
You can adjust the volume without taking your hands off
of the steering wheel.
App li es to veh icles: with multi-function steer ing whee l and Navigat ion system

Repeating a voice message

@
@

Fig. 18 Illustration of
the multi-function
steering wheel : Right
thumbwheel Fig. 19 Illustration of
the multi -function
steering wheel : Right
Adjusting the volume thumbwheel
- Roll the r ight thumbwheel @ up :!:.::3
to increase the
volume. - Press the right thumbwheel @ to repeat the navigation
- Roll the right thumbwheel @ down A to reduce the voice message => page 123. •
volume.
 MMI Display

MMI Display

Introduction From these main menus, different functions in the center of the
MMI Display can be displayed and performed, or you will receive
directions regarding these functions.
Overview with short description
The MMI Display areas designated in illustrations ~ fig . 20 and
Independent of the individual functions, several different ~ fig . 21 are described with their functions as follows:
main and sub menus appear in the MM/ Display.
0 Title line
The title line identifies the displayed main menu => fig . 20.
Switching between the individual main functions is carried out
through the function buttons => page 15.

® Corners of the display

These functions are independent of the menu you are current ly
viewing and are operated using the control buttons. The contro l
Fig. 20 MMI Display buttons are logically assigned to the corners of the screen. The
overview: Main radio screen corner on the top right corresponds to the top right control
menu button => page 16.

© Display Center in a main menu

Radio station or track lists are displayed in the center of the display
in radio and CD operat ion . In Navigation, the individual destination
mode is displayed . In the main Setup menus, a list of available func -
t ions is disp layed .

© Orientation symbols
The cursor and the various arrows in the MM I Display Center are
Fig. 21 MMI Display
overview : Telephone used to select various other functions => page 24.
menu
© Roaming symbol*
When you press a function button, the main menu assigned to that If your vehic le is equipped with a te lephone * and you are not using
function w ill be displayed. For example , if you press the [FMTAM] your home network, the display also shows the Roaming symbol .
~ page 75function button , the main radio menu will be disp layed.
© Cell Phone Provider*
If your vehicle is equipped with a telephone*, the display also shows
the name of the cell phone provider in the title bar. _,,,

General operation
MMI Display

The name shown for the cell phone provider in the MMI Display may @ Time of day
dif f er from the name shown for the cell phone provider in the cell The time of day set is displayed=> page 161.
phone display.
G) Signal strength bar*
0 Subtitle
Telephone reception is indicated by the vertical bars. The more
The subtitle shows detailed information about the selected sub signal strength bars that are filled, the better the quality of the cell
menu option, such as Phone book => page 23, fig . 21. phone connection.
© Display Center in a sub menu Instead of the signal strength bars, the abbreviations SIM * 1l or
You can operate the settings for the various MMI options in the PIN* 1l may be displayed .
Display Center or instructions are displayed. When SIM * 1l is displayed, you must insert a SIM card.

© Status bar When PIN* 1l is displayed, you must enter your PIN => page 98.
The status bar displays information on muting the active audio If you have connected a Bluetooth cell phone* to the MMI, the Blue-
source and instructions on using the telephone* => page 24. • tooth symbol* may also be displayed in addition => page 95. •

Status bar Cursor and arrows

Fig. 22 MMI Display:

Depiction of the
symbols in the status
bar

Fig. 23 Section of
The symbols in the status bar are displayed independently of the display: Orientation
menu selected. Consequently you can see in each menu whether symbol
you have activated the Mute/Pause function=> page 14.

G) Mute symbol
If the sound for the currently active audio source was switched off,
muting is shown by the mute symbol => page 14. 11 If your vehicle is equipp ed w ith a GSM cell phon e, th e SIM and PIN symbols
may be shown in the MM I Display.
 MMI Display

(D This cursor designates a chosen line in a menu . Operating the speller

® The arrows pointing up or down point to other menu points
(scrolling up/down) . Overview
© After a selection is made , this arrow points to other available
selections or possible settings. •

Selected text

Fig. 25 Speller display

for number entry :
Entering a street
number

Fig. 24 Section of
display: Example of
highlighted line

Fig. 26 Speller display

Your choice will be highlighted in white text => fig. 24. •
for letter entry: Desti-
nation entry in NAV

If required by the system, the speller will automatically appear in the

display. Then the system offers, independent of opera t ing mode,
either the option of entering numbers => fig. 25 or letters => fig. 26.
If necessary , you can manually change from numbers to letters ©
or from letters to numbers @ .
The designated symbols in the illustrations => fig. 25 => fig. 26 and
their corresponding actions are listed in the following table. ~

General operation
MMI Display

Legend
- Symbol/
Action [i] Tips
Description
When the ignition has been switched on, a warning message
The selected element has a =>page 10, fig. 2 will appear when the speller is used for the first
G) Selection arrow white background and is shown time while driving. Please read the warning message carefully and
larger in the entry ring. follow the instructions. •
The symbol to the left of the
© DEL cursor with the white fill is
Entering digits , letters and characters
deleted.
Cursor movement in entry field
You can make system entries easily using the speller.
0 <lt> forward/back .

© tr Switch between caps/no caps

Confirms an entry
© OK
Switches from number to letter
© A ....z
entry.

0 Entry cursor
Fig. 27 Speller display :
Entry field
© Entering numbers

Large image of the selected

© character/function. Entering digits, letters and characters

Selecting a suggestion from the - Select the desired letters, numbers or characters in the
@ LIST
list. speller display using the selector arrow G) by rotating
the control knob.
Switches from letter to number
@ 0 ..9
entry . - To confirm the entry, press the control knob after each
selection of a letter, number or character .
@ Space

Note for more list entries indi- - Select OK ® to close out the entry.
@ eating number of additional
entries . Deleting numbers, letters and characters
Sorted list of entries - With the selection arrow, select DEL ® by rotating the
control knob . _.,
 MMI Di s pl ay

- Press the control knob , and the last entry in the entry - Rotate the control knob to select a function on the
field will be deleted. control wheel 0-
- Press and hold down the control knob for a while : A ll - Confirm your selection by pressing t he control kno b.
characters are deleted.
The control wheel G) is divided into different segments. The func -
In some cases, such as in navigation, the selection of letters is tion of the segment depends on the current menu . •
limited by logica l exclusion .
In the main telephone * menu the number in the speller entry fie ld Functions in radio operation (FM / AM range )
can be de leted by pressing the [RETURN] button . •

Pr(•s4•ts R a dio FM B,HlC

I
Operating functions in the audio 92.({J ~Hz
menus
I
cliii
G
-
~

I ,
/
//r--- ."I

\
.Q)
Intr o du c tion e (_j

~11,·'/,,' 0
- "'---
-..
·-· I

The "control wheel " shown in the MM/ Display, together

with the "control knob ", enables easy operation of typical
functions for radio, Audi music in terface* and CD opera -
\
Tu nin g
,'g
-~

D
12.~ ""
_ ____
'-.....______ ,.,/ 0
Sound
Fig . 29 MMI Display:
Control whee l in t he
radio men u (FM/AM I

tion.
The f unctions available during radio operation are summarized in
the following tab le.

Symbol /
Legend Fun ction
D e scription
Manua l station setting back
G) <<
=> page 52.
Manual station setting forward
@ >>
~ page 52.
Fig. 28 MMI Display: -
Control whe el Automatic station seek back
© I<
~ page 53.
Press the corresponding function button, e.g . [CD]. - Automatic station seek forward
- Press the control button with the CD control function. © >I
=> page 53. ~

General operation
MMI Display

Legend
Symbol/
Description
Function
- Legend
Symbol/
Function
Description
Automatic station scan Station back=> page 58
© SCAN G) I<
=> page 54.

STORE
Store station/frequency © >I Station forward => page 58
© => page 53. Enter channel number
Displays the current station fre -
© Channel no .
=> page 59
0 Frequency display
quency. STORE Store station => page 58
©
© Frequency unit Displays the frequency unit.
• © SCAN
Automatic station scan
=> page 59
App li es to vehi cles : w it h Sat ell ite Digit al Au dio Radio Servi ce Displays the current channel
Functions in Satellite Radio operation © Channel number
number.
•
Functions in CD operation

Fig. 30 MMI Display:

Control wheel in the
radio menu (Satellite
Radio)
Fig. 31 MMI Display:
Control wheel in the CD
The functions available during radio operation are summarized in menu
the following table.
The functions available during CD operation are summarized in the
following table. _.,,
 MMI Di s pl ay

- Lege nd
- Symb o l/
Fu n c t io n
Ap plies to vehicles : with the Au di music interface , iPod adapter cab le and connect ed iPod

Functions in Interfac e op e ration

D esc ripti o n
Rapid reverse within a track
0 <<
=:> page 67.

Rapid forward within a track

0 >>
- © I<
=:> page 67.

Track previous => page 67.

-

© >I Track next=:> page 67.

Fig. 32 MMI Display:
Automatic track scan Control wh eel in t he
© SCAN
=:> page 67. Interface menu
Plays CD tracks in random order
© MIX
=:> page 68. The functions available during Interface operation with an iPod
- - connected via an iPod adapter cable are summarized in the
Naming a coal :::;,page 68 or following table.
0 NAMEal or INFO*bl
Track lnformation*bl :::;,page 68
Symb o l/
Displays the current track Le g e nd Fun c ti o n
© Track numbe~ 1 D es cription
numbera l _ -
Rapid reverse within a track
©
Duration of selec - Displays the duration of selec- 0 <<
=> page 73.
tion tion.
• - Rapid forward within a track
-
al This app l ies to audio CDs.
0 >>
=> page 73.
bl This app l ies to a M P3/WMA CD* that has been inserted into the CD
changer*.
© I< Track previous=:> page 73

© >I Track next =:>page 73.

Automatic track scan
© SCAN
=> page 73.
Plays CD tracks in random order
© MIX
=:> page 73.

0 INFO Track information => page 73.

Duration of selec- Displays the duration of selec-
© tion tion .
•
General operation
Drives

Drives

CD changer MP3 files WMA files

Appli es to vehic le s: w ith CD ch anger Format MPEG-1 layer 2 and 3 Version 7, 8 and 9
MPEG-2 layer 2 and 3
General information about your CD changer
Standard ISO 9660 level 1 and 2
File system Joliet (single session and multisession)
Bit rates
--L- 32 to 320 kbit/s and variable bit rate
Number of Maximum of 255 files per directory, maximum 255
files/ directories, in total, no more than 512 files and
di rectories directories per medium
ID3 tags/ Version 1, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 Version 7, 8 and 9, maxi-
WMAtags and 2.4, maximum 30 mum 30 characters
characters
Media sup- CD-ROM, CD-R, CD-RW with a capacity of 650 MB
ported and 700 MB
Fig. 33 Glove compart-
ment open: CD changer
In the case of MP3 files with a variable bit rate, there may be a
discrepancy between play time displayed and the real time.
G) CD eject button
0 CD tray MP3 music are normally subject to copyright law in accordance with
the applicable international and national regulations. Without the
® ILOAD I button prior consent of the copyright holder, duplications may not be made
© CD location button with LED (light emitting diode)
in some countries, not even for personal use .
Depending on the way your vehicle is equipped, the CD changer is
Please find out about and follow applicable copyright regulations.
either located in the glove compartment or in the center console.
Audio CDs or MP3/WMA CDs can be loaded into the CD changer. As long as you yourself hold these rights , for example , to your own
compositions and recordings or they were granted by the benefi -
CD operation is started and controlled v ia the MMI =:>page 63 .
ciary, these restrictions naturally do not apply .
Usable MP3/WMA files must have the following properties:

[i] Tips
• Please follow the information for handling CDs=:> page 33.
• The CD changer will not support playlists.
 Drives

• The CD changer will not support ORM-protected files . - Insert the CDs one after the other straight into the CD
• Because of the diversity of CD-R/CD-RW blanks and their various tray with the label side up 0-
The LEDs in each button ©
storage capacities, function may be limited for individual storage will stop blinking once a CD has been loaded into the
media. slot.
• Be sure to store the CDs that are not being played in the CD cases
designed for that purpose. Loading the CD into a specific empty slot
• If outside temperatures are extremely high or low, CD playback - Press the [ LOAD I button 0-The LED in the button © of
may be temporarily unavailable. A thermal switch has been installed any empty slot will start to blink.
to protect the CD and the laser scanner. •
- If you want to load a CD into a specific slot, you can also
press a button © , where the LED is not fit and insert your
App lies to vehicl es: w ith CD changer
CD.
Loading your CDs into the CD changer
- Wait until the red LEDs on the inside sides of the CD tray
The CD should never be forced into the drive . The CD is 0 (not shown in the illustration) start to blink.
pulled in automatically. - Now insert your CDs (printed side up and straight) into

Loading just one CD

the CD tray 0-
- Press the [LOAD) button 0
=:> page 30, fig. 33. As soon as Loading the CD into a specific slot
the CD changer is ready for you to load a CD, the red LEDs - Press the [ LOAD] button 0-The LEDs in the buttons ©
on the inside sides of the CD tray 0 (not shown in t he for the slots that already have CDs loaded illumina te .
ill ustration) start to blink .
- If you press an illuminated button that is not blinking ©
- Inser t the CD straight into the CD tray and with the label then that CD will be ejected.
side up 0-The CD automatically loads into the next free
slot in the CD changer. The LED in the button G) will stop - Remove the ejected CD from the CD tray 0-
blinking. - Insert a CD that you want to load, label up, into the CD

Loading all CDs

tray0-
- Press and hold the [ LOAD I button 0 for longer than two If you pr ess the ILOAD I button again whi le you are loading all CDs,
the loading process will be interrupted.
seconds.
If you choose a slot which already has a CD loa ded in it, the CD will
- Wait until the red LEDs on the inside sides of the CD tray be ejected . Remove the CD, and insert the new CD you want to have
0
(not shown in t he illustration) start to blink. in this slot. ~

General operation • •
Dri ve s

If you wa it longer than 30 seconds without removing the CD, the CD Ap plies to vehi cles: w ith CD ch ang er

wi ll be pu ll ed back int o th e CD chang er automatically . Changing a CD

The currently selected CD can be changed by pressing one
[i ] Tip s of the CD location buttons.
Please f ollow the i nformat ion fo r handling CDs ::;, page 33. •
Press a button © => page 30, fig . 33 for a memory locat ion
that is occupied by an audio CD or MP3/WMA CD. The CD
Appli es to veh icles: with CD changer
inserted at t his location is played. •
Ejecting CDs from the CD changer

Ejec tin g a CD DVD drive

- Press the CD eject butto n G) => page 30, fig . 33.
Ap plies to ve hi cles: w ith Navigat ion sy stem
- Press the button (LED on) © to eject an individua l CD, or General
- Press the CD eject button G) aga in to eject the CD you are
playing .

Eje c ting all CDs

- Hold down the butto n G) for more t han two seconds. A ll
CDs that are currently in the CD changer will be ejec t ed.

If you wait longer than 30 seconds wit hout removing the CD, the CD
wi ll be pu ll ed back into the CD changer automatically .

0 Note
Fig. 34 DVD drive for
• Always keep your CDs in their original cases to protect them
t he Navigation syst em
from d irt, dust, scratches or ot her damage .
• Never expose CDs to direct sunlight . G) DVD eject button
(v DVDtray
[i ] Tip s Depending on the way your vehicle is equipped, the DVD drive is
Please follow the information for handling CDs ::;, page 33. • located in the trunk, either in the left side storage compartment or
underneath the floor cover. ~
 D rives

If you have not inserted a DVD into the DVD drive, then you cannot App lies to vehicles: with Navigation system

use the Navigat ion feature. Ejecting a navigation DVD

[i ] Tip s Press the eject button (D =:> page 32, fig. 34. The nav iga-
• Navigation DVDs are available at your authorized Audi dealer, as
t ion DVD will be ejected .
well as navigation DVD updates .
• Please follow the information
=:>page 33 . •
for handling navigation DVDs 0 Note
• Always store your navigation DVDs in their orig inal cases to
protect them from dirt, dust, scratches and other damage .
Applies to veh icles: w ith Navigat ion system • Never expose the navigation DVD to direct sunlight.
Loading the navigation DVD
[i ] Tips
- Hold the navigation DVD by the center hole or by the Please follow the information for handling navigation DVDs
outer edge. =:>page 33. •
Insert the navigation DVD into the DVD drive (printed side
facing up and straight). The DVD will be pulled in auto-
matically . General Notes regarding CD/DVD
operation
Before you insert a navigation DVD, make sure there is not a naviga-
tion DVD already in the drive . If there is, eject it first by pressing the
eject button:::::, page 33 and then insert the new DVD.
8cm (3"} CO
Never force the navigation DVD into the slot. The navigation DVD
0
wi ll be pulled into the DVD drive automatica lly.
If you see this message in the MM I Display Please check navigat ion
DVD, then you cannot use the Navigation feature =:>page 33.
If you see this message in the MMI Display Navigation is being
initi alized ... then the Navigation system is in the Start Phase. You
cannot use the Navigation system until this message disappears
from the disp lay.
Fig. 35 Do not use t he
[i ] Tips foll owing CDs! .,.

Never use a scratched or damaged navigation DVD:::::,page 33. •

General operation
Dri ve s

C ondition s for good s ound

Problem Solution
To ensure good, high -quality sound reproduction and to prevent
damage t o t he drives, p lease observe t he fol lowi ng: CD or navigation DVD is dirty Clean the CD or navigation DVD.

Do not use damaged or scratched CDs @. CD or navigation DVD is Replace the CD or navigation
scrat ched. DVD w ith on e witho ut scratc hes.
Do not use single CDs (8 cm/ 3 inch diameter) @ .
CD or navigation DVD was Insert the CD or navigation DVD
Do not use CDs of different shapes @ . inserted upside down . label side up.
Do not attach labels @ .
Cond ensa ti o n has form ed on Wait unt i l the equipment is dry.
Do not use protective rings © - the CD or navigat ion DVD.
Do not use dirty CDs. The mechanism for the dr ive is Have it inspecte d by an Aud i
malfunctioning . dealer or a qua lified electronics
Do not use protective CD fi lm or stabilizer .
stor e.
Always keep CDs in a protective sleeve and do not expose them to
direct sunlight .
[i ] Tip s
Cleaning drives a nd CDs or n av igation DVDs
• Copyrighted CDs, or CDs having CD-ROM particles , which do not
Never use a cleaning CD to clean the drives . confo rm to audio CD standards cannot be played by your CD drive.
Clean CDs or navigation DVDs with a soft, lint -free cloth . Wipe the Use on ly CDs having the fol lowing logo on the CD itse lf "Compact
CD in a stra ight line fr o m the center outwar d s. Heavy so iling can be Disc Digita l Audio " .
removed with a commercia l CD cleaner or isopropy l alcohol. Never • If outside temperatures are extremely high or low, playback of
use gaso line, paint thinner or record clea ner since they can damage the navigation DVD may be temporarily unavailable. A therma l
the CDs and navigation DVD. sw itch has been installed to protect the navigation DVD and the
laser scanner.
Using la s er equ ipment
• Do not remove the cover. The device contains no parts that can
Laser equipment is divided into safety classes 1 to 4 in accordance
be repaired by the consumer . •
with DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6/VDE 0837. The d rives meet safe ty class 1. The
laser is so low powered or shielded so that correc t use wil l not cause
any hazard .

R e ad e rror displ ay
A read error d isplay can be caused by t he fo ll owing:
 Drives

Audi music interface G) Interface for the Audi music interface

® Storage console
Applies to vehicles : Audi Music Interface G) Cover
Introduction © Plug for connecting to the Audi music interface

A variety of portable players can be connected to the Audi

© Adapter cable * (e. g. iPod adapter cable * )

music interface.
© Storage tray can be pushed in/pulled out
0 iPod plug to the iPod adapter cable*
© iPod*
@ iPod adapter cable *
@ 3.5 mm stereo jack adapter cable *
@ Mini USB adapter cable *
@ USB adapter cable*
Depending on how your vehicle is equipped, the Audi music inter-
face will be located either in the glove compartment or in the media
center underneath the center armrest~ page 36. You connect your
portable player (e.g. MP3 player) to the Audi music interface using
special adapter cables*. You can purchase adapter cables* from
Fig. 36 Audi music
interface with iPod
your authorized Audi dealer or an electronics store.
adapter cable and iPod

0 Note
Very high or very low vehicle interior temperatures can damage the
iPod and/or impair its performance.
• If temperatures are very high or very low, do not leave your
portable player in the vehicle. •

Fig. 37 Audi Music

Interface: Adapter
cable

General operation
Drives

App li es to vehicles: with media compartment under the center armrest App lies to veh icles: w ith Aud i mus ic in terface and adapter cab le

Open and close media compartment Connect the adapter cable to the Audi music
interface
The Audi music interface* can be installed in the media
compartment.
Open the media compartment* under the center arm rest
~ page 36.

- Flip the cover up 0 ~ page 35, fig. 36 .

Connect the adapter cable to the Audi music interface
~ page 35, fig. 36.

0 Note
Handle the adapter cable with the appropriate care. Do not let the
cable kink. •
Fig. 38 Media
compartment under
App li es to vehic les: w ith Audi mus ic in te rface and ada pte r cab le
the center armrest
Disconnect the adapter cable from the Audi
Opening the Media Compartment music interface
Flip the center armrest up.
Pull the release lever for the seat toward the back
~ fig. 38. The media compartment will open up.

Closing the Media Compartment

Press the media compartment down until it clicks into
place.

0 Note Fig. 39 Adapter cable:

Any protruding parts could be damaged when closing the media Unlock the jack from
the Audi music inter-
compartment, or damage the media compartment itself. Make sure
face ...
when closing the media compartment, that all accessories (e.g.
adapter cable, storage tray, cover) have been properly stored. •
 Drives

Ap plies to vehicles: w it h Audi music in te rface and adapte r cab le

Use the iPod adapter cable to connect the

iPod*
The iPod* uses the iPod adapter cable to connect to the
Audi music interface.

Fig. 40 Adapter cable:

Pull the disconnected
jack from the Audi
music interface

Requirement: The glove compartment and cover for the

Aud i music interface are open @ =>page 35, fig. 36
- First press the jack @ into the Audi music interface
=>page 36, fig. 39. Fig. 41 Remove the
iPod jack from the iPod
- Then press the release catch @ on the jack down
=> page 36, fig . 39. The jack will release. ConnecttheiPodjack
- Hold the release catch @ down while pulling the jack out - Connect the iPod adapter cable to the iPod*.
from the Audi music interface © => fig . 40.
Remove the iPod jack
0 Note -
0
Release the lock by simultaneously
=> fig . 41.
pressing the buttons
• Pull the jack care f ully ou t from t he Audi mus ic inter f ace to avoid
damaging the interface. - Pull the jack carefully out of the iPod * @.
• Handle the adapt er cabl e with the appropriate care. Do not let
the cable kink. • Place the connected iPod * in the storage compartment => page 35,
fig. 36.
The iPod battery * uses the adapter cable to charge as soon as the
iPod* is connected to the Audi music inte rface and the ignition is
on .

General operation
Drives

The MMI functions described in => page 72 are available for the
Operating Operating the Operating the-
following listed iPods:
the MMI screen multi-function
• iPod Mini (Version 1.3.0, 1.4.0 and 1.4.1) iPod* steering wheel*
• iPod nano 1G - firs t g eneration (Version 1.1, 1.1.1 and 1.3) Forward Press the right arrow but-
• iPod 5G - fifth generation video (Version 1.1.2) ton and hold it down
• iPod 4G - fourth generation (Version 3.1.1) => page 17

Other iPod versions cannot be used with the iPod adapter cable. Button Press the ON/OFF button Roll the right menu
Using th e op t ional 3.5 mm stereo jack adapt er cable *, you can "Start/Pause" or turn it to the right or thumbwheel down A
connect these devices as portable players => page 40. left=> page 14 or upward !.::I
=> page 22
The following chart will compare and contrast the controls on the
iPod* with the controls on the MMl/multi -function steering wheel * : "Click wheel" On/Off knob - adjusting Roll the right menu
volume => page 14 thumbwheel
Operating Operating the Operating the- => page22
the MMI screen multi-function Turn control knob Roll the right menu
iPod* steering wheel* => page 16 thumbwheel down-
Button "Menu" Button IRETURN I or upward => page 20
=> page 17 Button "Select" Press the control knob Press the left menu
Select Folder Up on the Select Folder Up on => page 16 thumbwheel
MMI Display => page 72, the instrument clus - => page20
fig.84 ter display using the
left menu control Problems with the iPod influence MMI function In these types of
wheel => page 74, cases, please reset your iPod (refer to iPod Operator's Manual).
fig.86 MMI does not support the following iPod operations:
Previous track Press the left arrow but - • Evaluating music tracks
ton => page 17
• Jumping to a certain spot on the track
Rewind Press the left arrow but - • Adding tracks for an "On-th e-go" playlist
ton and hold it down
• Displaying folder "compilations"*. In addition, those tracks that
=> page 17
are tagged with "Part of a Compilation" will not be listed in the list
Next track Press the right arrow but - of artists if Compilation was activated in the iPod. ~
ton => page 17
 Dri ves

[i ] Tips M P3 fi les WMA fi les

• Further information on operating your iPod* via MMI is available Format MPEG-1, MPEG-2 Version 7, 8 and 9
in =>page 72. M PEG-2.5
• Refer to the iPod operating instructions for importan t informa -
-St and ard -
ISO 9660 leve l 1 and 2
tion on how t o use your iPod* .
File system FAT16,FA T32
• We recommend keep ing your iPod* software up -to -dat e.
File names Display of file names restricted by MM I display
• Your authorized Audi dealer can supp ly you wi t h up -to -date
inf ormat ion on the Audi music interface . • Bit rates 8 to 320 kbit/s and vari- 64 to 320 kbit/s and vari-
able bit rate abl e bit rate

App lies to vehicle s: w ith Aud i mu sic int erfac e and USS/mi ni USS adapte r cab le Number of Maxi m um of 500 f iles pe r directory
files (operation is limited after 500 files)
Connecting portable player with a USB / mini
USB adapter cable Folder struc - maximum of 7 su bf olders
ture
You can connect various USB storage media to the Audi
Play lists maximum of 119 p lay lists, no more than 1000
music interface with a USB/mini USB adapter cable. ent ries per p lay list
Place the connected storage media in the storage co mpartment Format M3U, PLS,B4S
=>page 35, fig . 36. play lists
The Audi music interface supports USB storage media in "USB ID3 t ags/ Version 1, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 Version 7, 8 and 9,
device subclass 1, 2 and 6" . You can obtain informat ion about the WMA tags and 2.4, max. 30 characters
"USB device subc lass" for a storage m edium from the manufacturer . max . 30 charac t ers
The fol lowing USB storage media are supported:
Please not e that music files are copyr ight protected .
• USB sticks
• Si ng le card reader
• Multi -card reader (f irs t card slot us ed)
[i ] Tips
• You can speed up the search for music fil es on the USB storage
• USB MP3 p layer not requiring any specia l driver software med ium connected by setting up a centra l f older for music fi les and
• External USB flash storage p lay lists and putting it in the first position alphabetica lly on the
• Ext ernal USB hard disks (HDDl - 1", 1.8", 2.5" drives with a con t in - storage medium .
uous start -up cu rrent of max. 800 mA • Do not use USB extension cab le or adapt er. They interfere w ith
The MMI operation of the USB st o rage med ium is described in fu n ctionality .
=>page 72. • ORM-protected files are not supported by the Audi music int er-
face. ~
MP3/WWA files must have the fo llowing propert ies:

General operation • •
Dri ve s

• Because of the diversity of USB storage media and the ir different

storag e capac ities , function may be limited w ith ind ividual storage [i ] Tips
med ia. We recommend adjusting t he po rtable player's sound level to about
• You can find current information on the Int ernet at 70 percent of the maximum possib le volume . Use the Input level
"www .audiusa.com". => page 76to adapt the volume to, for examp le, the radio . •
• An iPod shuff le cannot be used wit h t he USB/mini USB adapter
cable. •

Applies to vehi cl es: wit h Aud i mu sic int erfac e and 3.5 stere o jack ad apter cable

Connect your portable player through the

3.5mm stereo jack adapter cable
Connect your portable player (e.g. MP3 player) to the Audi
music interface using 3.5 mm stereo jack adapter cables .
- Plug the 3.5 mm stereo jack into the portable player 's
headphone jack . The audio wi l l play through yo ur
veh icle's sou nd system .

You can adjust the volume => page 14 and the input level for the
audio source => page 76.
If the Audi music interface has already been selec t ed as the Source
=> page 63, you might hear a little stat ic when you plug and unplug
the 3.5 mm stereo jack . You're most likely fami liar w ith this smal l
amount of background noise from your own home stereo system. In
order to get around the static , either use Mute/Pause before plug -
ging in or unplugging your portable p layer => page 14 or turn on
anothe r audio source (rad io => page 46, CD => page 63).
The sound from a portable player connected via a 3.5 mm stereo
jack adap t er cable will be at the same leve l as the vo lume set f o r
MMI.
Volume depends on what the output volume for the portable player
was set at, as we ll as the input level. That 's w hy in this i nsta nce,
vo l ume that is too high cannot automat ically be turned down .
 MMI Fr e qu e nt ly Ask e d Qu e stions (FAQ )

MMI Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Introduction

This section answers frequently asked questions about the MMI. In

addition , you will get useful tips t o help you understand and operate
the system . If you have a problem, this info rmation will help you
out . •

Fig. 43 MMI Display:

General Mu te function

"' N o res pon se t o y o u r e n t ri es?

If t he system do es not respond to your entry, you can reset the MMI
Q)~ I
system. Press the (S ETU P ] function button G), the control knob ®
and th e upper right contro l button @ at t he same t i me => f ig. 42.
The system is ready again => page 18.

- You h ea r n a viga ti on in s tructions but no musi c?

By pressing the ON/OFF knob briefly, the MMI can be muted so you

--- fl
won 't be disturbed by t he radio or CD changer => pag e 14,
"Mute/Pause function". In the status bar (bottom line in the MM I
Fig. 42 MMI Termin al: Display) the activated Mute/Pause function is shown as a symbol G)
Key combi nat ion w hen => fig . 43. Press or turn the ON/OFF knob to cance l the muting.
resett ing syst em Muting occurs automatically during a telephone* call. •

General operation
MMI Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

Appl ies to vehicles: w it h Navigat ion system entry screen with direct input of the final destination will be
Navigation system displayed :::;,fig. 45.

Does the Navigation system not calculate a detour,

even though you have entered settings in the Avoid
route from here function in the Navigation submenu
Route?
The Navigation system can calculate a route only if details
regarding the local situation are available . If a detour is not
possible, the Navigation system will not offer an alternative route
:::;,page 143. •
Fig. 44 Navigation:
Route without stop-
over

Fig. 45 Navigation:
Main menu

Does the MMI continuously display the message Please

check navigation DVD?
Possibly the navigation DVD is dirty and cannot be read. Clean the
DVD from the cent er outward using a soft lint-free cloth:::;, page 33.

When calling up the NAV main function, is there no

display of the destination entry screen vvith a final
destination {navigation main menu)?
The function Route with stopover is active. Press the upper right
control button for the Route function and confirm the menu item
Route without stopover:::;, fig . 44 by pressing the control knob. The
 MMI Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

General operation • •
-
RADIO , CD /AUX
RADIO

RADIO

Introduction The following submenus are available in the radio

function:

Selecting radio function Control button

The radio settings in the MM/ can be selected via the functions Radio submenus
~ fig. 46
[FM i AMj function button.
G)

0
Presets

Dynamic
Radio FM
stat ion list
-.
B,
d
\ fl"
\ .
Presets
)
Preset list

FM
~ 90.3M Hz WA IH Band AM
SJ() 9 MH~ W/1MK Satellite Radio*
(Radio Sirius*)

~
96 3 MHz WAJZ

WALK Balance
9/:,MHz
© Fader
10,1:, MHz WABT
0 Fig. 46 MMI Display:
Sound
~ page 77 Treble
Tl 111i11fJ 12 :0Q AM SO\lrlCl
Main radio menu Bass
osp al BOSE
- Press the IFM 'l'AM] function button => page 15. The main Volume settings
radio menu (station list) => fig . 46 or the previous active
radio function menu appears in the MMI Display. .. Tune up
Tuning Tune down
- Press one of the control buttons => page 16 to move to (FM/AM range) Seek up
the appropriate submenus G) to © => fig. 46. Seek down
Store station
Scan
Station forward
© Station back
Tuning
(Sirius*) Store station
Channel number
Scan
a> Digita l Sign al Processing
 RADIO

T h e f o llowi n g s u b m e nu s ar e av ail a ble in t h e radio Band control button (frequency)

se tup f un c ti o n :

R a dio se tup subm e nu s Selecting frequency band

Press the [SET UP !
function button in the
FM radio function
=> page 54
Stat ion reception Radio stations are located in different frequency bands.
Station d isplay
Previous stations
Delet e previous stations
Delete radio presets

Press the [SET UP ! Station reception

function button in the Delete radio presets
AM radio func t ion
=> page 54
Press the [SET UP ! Sort station by Fig. 47 Rad io: Avail-
Station info ab le fr eq ue ncy b and
f unction button in the
sat ellite* radio function Category filter
(Sirius*) Receiver se rial number Press t he Ba nd contro l button in the radio menu.
=> pag e 60 Delete radio presets
- Select your desired f requency band by rotat in g the
contro l knob.
[i ] Tips Press the control knob to confirm your selection .
You can se lect the reception area and the radio stat ions from the
inst rumen t cluster display us ing the mu lti-func t ion steering wheel * T h e following f re qu e n cy b a nd s are avai la bl e :
=> page 50.
Fr e qu e n c y b a nd Abbr e vi a tion
• If you encounter bad reception in cove red areas (such as a tunnel
or parking garages), the vo l ume is reduced to prevent static. • Frequency modulation FM
Amplitude modulation AM
Sate llite Radio Radio Sirius *

[i ] Tips
You can also switch between the FM, A M and satell ite radio
fr equ ency bands by rep eatedly pressing the [FMTAMI button . •

·-.,,- .. • •
RADIO

Main radio menu Radio station list on the FM band

The radio station list on the FM band is modified automat-
General ically.
The radio station list for the selected frequency band is
displayed in the main radio menu.
The station lists for the FM and AM bands differ in their behavior . In
the FM station list you can display Previous stations, the stations
that you have listened to for some time (favorite stations) ~ fig. 48.
The FM station list ~ fig. 49 is adapted automatically (dynamically)
and the AM station list ~ page 49, fig. 50 has to be updated manu -
ally (statically) .
Fig. 48 Radio FM :
The station list in the Sirius Satellite Radio* main menu is updated Previous stations
dynamically.
The title line of the MMI Display shows you whether the radio
station is operating in FM, AM or Sirius * . The frequency band can be
selected with t he Band con t rol button ~ page 47 or by repeatedly
pressing the (FM TAM I button ~ page 15.

[i J Tips
You can select the frequency band and the radio stations in the
instrument cluster display from the multi-function steering wheel* Fig. 49 Radio FM :
~ page 50, "Radio menu in the instrument cluster display" . • Dynamic station list

- Press the (FMi AM] function button.

- Select the desired radio station in the main FM radio
menu with the control knob .

If the main FM radio menu does not appear after pressing the func -
tion button, you can change the frequency band by pressing the
Band control button ~ page 47 or by repeatedly pressing the
IFM TAM l function button~ page 15. _.,

The FM station list is dynamic and adapts automatically to the
current reception status . All the FM stations that can be received are
on this list. The list is limited to a maximum of 30 stations .
In FM operation, the functions of the control wheel => page 27
{control button with Tuning function) refer to the FM band.
If the Previous stations function is set to on in Setup Radio FM, the
radio stations that you have listened to for some time {favorite
stations) => page 48, fig. 48 are displayed in the first five positions
of the station list. Other receivable stations are displayed after that
in the Dynamic station list => page 48, fig. 49.
If you are located outside of the broadcasting ranges of your
favorite stations, you will not be able to select those stations with
"greyed out" letters.
To cancel selection of your favorite stations, select Delete previous
stations in the radio setup menu => page 56. •
Radio station list on the AM band
The list of radio stations on the AM band has to be
adjusted manually to the current reception status.
Fig. 50 Radio AM:
Static station list
- Press the IFMi AM] function button.
•• ••
RADIO I..
In the main AM radio menu select Update station list
with the control knob to update the list of radio stations.
Select the desired radio station.
If the main AM radio menu does not appear after pressing the func -
tion button, you can change the frequency band by pressing the
Band control button => page 47 or by repeatedly pressing the
IFMTAM ) function button=> page 15.
The AM band radio station list is static and has to be changed manu -
ally. All the AM stations that can be received are included at this
time in the station list in this manually activated search. The list is
limited to a maximum of 30 stations .
In AM operation, the functions of the control wheel => page 27
{control button with Tuning function) refer to the AM band.
If you are outside the transmission range for your station, it will still
be displayed but there will be interference in the signal. In that case
update your list of stations . •
Applies to veh icles : wi th Satellite Dig ital Au di o Rad io Serv ice
Radio station list in satellite mode
The available radio stations are listed in the satellite radio
ma,n menu.
Fig. 51 Radio: Sirius
station list ..
RADIO

- Press the IFM i AM] function button. App lie s to vehicles : with mul ti-func tion steer ing wheel

Radio menu in the instrument cluster display

- Select the desired radio station in the main Sirius radio
menu with the control knob. The frequency bonds and the receivable stations con also
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.
If you are not in the main satellite radio menu {Radio Sirius) after
pressing the function button, you can change the frequency band
by pressing the Band control button => page 47 or by repeatedly
pressing the (FMTAMlfunction button=> page 15.
The Presets control button functions the same for all bands {FM, AM
or Sirius*)=> page 51.
The functions of the Tuning button of the satellite radio will be
described starting with section => page 56.
The ID number of the Sirius* satellite tuner can be displayed using
the setup function => page 57.
Fig. 52 Instrument

[i ) Tips cluster display : Radio

• To use the satellite program, you must have an additional tuner
in the vehicle and a contract with a service provider {Sirius*). Acti-
vating the satellite radio service is described starting => page 57.
• The description of the setup function starts at section
=> page 60. •
menu
- Press the [FM i AM ]function button in the MMI Terminal if
the radio is deactivated.
- Press the !MODE] button on the multi -function steering
wheel=> page 20 until the radio menu => fig. 52 is
displayed.
- If necessary, select the desired frequency band by rolling
and pressing the left thumbwheel on the multi -function
steering wheel, or
- Select Presets by rolling and pressing the left thumb-
wheel on the multi-function steering wheel to display the
preset Iist, or
- Select the desired station by rolling and pressing the left
thumbwheel on the multi-function steering wheel. 1))-
 RADIO

You can select the frequency band and t he station either in the MMI Presets control button
or in the instrument cluster display . Neither has priority . The last
confirmed select ion remains active independe nt of the current
Using the presetlist
operation . The current selection - stations or presetlist - is shown in
the MMI Display or in the instrument cluster disp lay. The control button with the "Presets" function lists the
If the presetlist is shown in the instrument cluster display, you can stations saved.
switch by selecting a reception area for the station list of the
selected reception area.
If you are outside the FM transmission range of your favorite station
it wi ll be "greyed out" in the MMI Disp lay and wil l no longer be
selectab le. The "greyed out" stations in the MMI Display are not
shown in the instrument cluste r d isplay . Only stations that you are
able to receive on the FM band are shown in the instrument cluster
d isplay .
If you are outside the AM transmiss ion ranges for various stations, Fig. 53 Radio:
they wi ll not be removed automatically from the station list and also Prese t list
not shown "greyed out" in the MMI Display . The stations t hat are
shown in the MM I Display are also shown in the instrument cluster Saving a new station in th e pr e set list
display . You can also update t he stat ion list using the Updat e
Select the desired radio stat ion in the main radio menu
st ation list function in the instrument cluster display .
wit h the control knob.
The satel lite radio transmitters are indicated in the MMI Display and
in the instrument cluster d isplay. - Press the control knob again and hold it down until the
submenu Presets appears in the MMI Display, or
If you press the trip computer reset button while the radio station
list is shown in the instrument cluster disp lay, the display w ill auto- Press the Preset s control b utton .
matical ly switch to the trip computer .
- Press the co ntrol knob t o confirm Stor e st ation station-ID
=>fig . 53.
[i ] Tip s
• If the navigation * disp lay is shown in the instrument cluster Select your desired preset location by rotating the
display, press the IMODE) button until the current audio list is contro l knob.
displayed . Press the control knob to save the station.
• Detai led information about the trip computer reset button can
be found in your vehicle Owner's Manual. • Selecting a st a tion from th e presetlist
- Press t he Preset s co ntro l button in the radio menu.

·-.,,- .. • •
RADIO

- By rotating and pressing the control knob, select a

station from the presetlist. [i] Tips
You can also call up the presetlist in the instrument cluster display
Moving a station within the presetlist =>page 50. •
- Press the Presets control button in the radio menu.
- By rotating and pressing the control knob, select a Tuning contro l button (FM/AM range)
station from the presetlist.
Manual station selection
- Press the control knob again, and hold it down until Store
station Station name appears in the MMI Display, or
l,...,,
- By rotating and pressing the control knob, select the
Move station Station name function above the presetlist.
Pr (•....,1...-t...., Ra di o FM
92 .3 MHz

Tu rn , u p
1
- Select a new preset location by rotating the control knob. I ( , .~
-
__
"\ I
I
'

\
- Press the control knob. The station is stored in the new /\,1 1 -L·
I

preset location. 1 I
I

You can save up to 25 stations in the presetlist. The frequency band Fig. 54 Radio: Manual
Tun i ng 12 :00 - Sour id
tuning (forward)
=> page 47 is indicated in each case to the right of the station name
=>page 51, fig. 53.
- Press the Tuning control button in the FM/AM radio
When you save a new station , an empty preset location will be
menu.
offered automatically. You may also select any other preset location
or you can replace one that is already taken . - Select>> (Tune up)~ fig . 54 or<< (Tune down) in the
A change of station in the presetlist automatically causes an adjust - MMI Display by rotating the control knob.
ment of the frequency band . For example, if you are tuned to FM and - Press the control knob to set the desired station
select an AM station from the presetlist, the radio automatically
frequency.
switches to the AM frequency.
In Setup Radio, you can delete an individual saved radio station or Briefly pressing the control knob will change the frequency in small
all saved radio stations using the Delete radio presets function steps. If you hold the control knob down, the frequency changes
(=> page 56 and =>page 62). more rapidly. When you release the control knob, the frequency
adjustment stops.
To see how you can set and save stations manually, see => page 52
and => page 58. With the manual option for setting radio stations , even weak
stations can be set and saved.
 RADIO

If you have selected a weak station in the FM band, it does not Saving stations (STORE)
continu e to appear on the station list as a selection after changing
radio stations. When you save weak stations, you can recall them
using the presetlist =:> page 53. • ---
Pn••.;1•ts R a dio
92 .3 MHz
FM
!'~1
Automatic seek mode '

-\ ,,
r,1t I.·

~ 51 0 ,ci
a tnt ,on

Fig. 56 Radio : Store

Tuning 12 :00 AM ~)t 11 II 11 i
station

Fig. 55 Radio: Auto-

matic seek mode
forward

- Press the Tuning control button in the FM/AM radio

menu.
- Select >I (Seek up)~ fig. 55 or I< (Seek down) in the MMI Fig. 57 Radio:
Preset list
Display by rotating the control knob.
- Press the control knob to begin automatic frequency - Press the Tuning control button in the FM/AM radio
search. menu.

The system will automatically look for and set the next receivable
station when you briefly press the control knob.
The selectivity of the seek mode can also be adjusted =:> page 55,
"Station reception (FM/AM range)" . •
- Rotate and press the control knob to select the desired
station frequency ~ page 52.
- By rotating and pressing the control knob, select STORE
(Store station) ~ fig. 56.
- Select your desired preset location by rotating the
control knob.
- Press the control knob. The station is saved in the
presetlist ~ page 51.

•• ••
RADIO

Up to 25 stations from al l three frequency bands=:> page 47 can be Setup Radio (FM/AM range)
saved in the preset list =:>page 51.
When you save a new station, an empty preset location will be Opening and closing Setup
offered automatically. You can also choose any other preset loca-
tion.
In Setup Radio, you can delete an individual saved radio station or
all saved radio stations using the Delete radio presets function
(=:>page 56 and =:>page 62). •

Automatic station scan (SCAN)

Use the SCAN function to play each station you currently
Fig. 59 Setup Radio:
receive for a moment. Station reception

- --
I >r ( •~-:.t •ts Rndi o FM Senn
92 .3 MHz
r~1 - In a radio menu, press the [SETUP)fu nction button to
open the ma in Setup menu for t he radio function
~ fig. 59.
I ,'
~\ Scon ~
~Jf,)
f'v11<;
- Press the [SETUP! button again to close the main Setup
menu again.

The settings avai la ble in Radio Setup depend on t he reception

Fig. 58 Radio: SCAN range selected . If you have set an FM reception area, you can se lect
f uni ny 12 :QQAM Sou11d
funct ion
all the settings listed below. If you have set the AM reception area,
you can select settings for the "Station reception" and "De lete radio
- Press the Tuning control button in the FM/AM radio presets" functions.
menu.
The following settings are possible in Setup Radio:
- By rotating the contro l knob, select SCAN ~ fig . 58.
• Station reception (Radio FM/AM) =:>page 55
- Press t he control knob to begin SCAN. • Station disp lay (Radio FM) =:>page 55

- Press the contro l knob again to stop the SCAN function.
All receivable stations are played for a f ew seconds .
To select the station that is current ly being p layed, press the control
knob again. •
• Previous stations (Radio FM) =:>page 55
• Delete previous stations (Radio FM) =:>page 56
• Delete radio presets (Radio FM/AM) =:>page 56
 RADIO

The time/date, sound and settings functions and the brightness of Station display (FM range)
the display can be adjusted using the control buttons =.- page 160.
The ticker text or station name display can be paused or
hidden.
[i] Tips
We recommend that you enter these settings when the vehicle is
stationary . Please note => page 10, "Notes on Traffic Safety". •

Station reception (FM/AM range)

The selectivity for the automatic seek function can also be
adjusted.
- Press the !SETUP] function button in the FM/AM radio Fig. 60 Setup Radio:
Station display
menu.
- Select Station reception. - Press the (SETUP] function button in the FM radio menu.

Local station reception - Select Station display.

Automatic seek:::.- page 53stops on ly at stations or frequencies with - Select fixed to stop any t ransm itted ticker text, or
strong reception.
- Select variable to display the ticker text, or
Distant station reception
- Select off to hide the ticker text or station names.
Automatic seek =:>page 53 also stops at distant, weaker stations or
frequencies. If you have set the Station display function to variable and ticker
texts are being transmitted by the broadcas t ing service, ticker texts
are displayed for the radio station you have set. •

Previous stations (FM range)

The list of favorite stations can be displayed in the main
FM radio menu.
- Press the (SETUP] function button in the FM radio menu.
- Select Previous stations.
RADIO

- Select on to display the list of favorite stations in the initially displayed empty . The contents of your "favorite station list"
main radio menu, or are generated and updated automatically. •

- Select off to display only the Dynamic station list in the

main radio menu. Delete radio presets (FM /AM range)

If you activate the Previous stations function, your favorite stations The individual preset entries or all preset entries on the
are displayed in the first five positions of the FM station lis t presetlist can be deleted.
=> page 48, fig. 48. The list of favorite stations is generated automat -
- Pressthe[SETUP!function button in the FM/AM radio
ically from the radio stations that you have listened to for some
time. Other receivable stations are displayed after that in the menu.
Dynamic station list => page 48, fig. 49. - Select Delete radio presets ~ fig. 61.
- Select Delete individually and select the station to be
[i J Tips deleted in the presetlist, or
The list of Previous stations can be deleted=> page 56. •
- Select Delete all entries. All entries on the presetlist are
deleted. •
Delete previous stations (FM range)
The list of "Previous stations" can be deleted.
Satellite Digital Audio Radio Service
Ap pli es to veh icles: w ith Satelli te Digi tal Audio Radio Service

Technical requirements

In addition to the radio in your vehicle, a tuner module has to be

Fig. 61 Setup Radio:
Delete previous
stations
Press the [SETUP] function button in the FM radio menu.
- Select and confirm Delete previous stations.
Radio stations are not deleted, only the ranking of your "favorite
stations" is cancelled => page 48. The list of Previous stations is
installed in order t o receive satellite programs. For the system to
function, existing satellite technology must be available and oper-
ating properly. Objects such as buildings, tunnels, bridges, terrain ,
other vehicles or objects on the roof of the vehicle can result in
decreased performance . Satellite Radio reception is not available in
Alaska and Hawaii.
If you would like to retrofit a tuner, please consult your Audi dealer.
You can select Radio Satellite mode (Radio Sirius) by operating t he
Band control button => page 47 or by repeatedly pressing the
[FMTAM )function button => page 15. If you have not yet installed a _..
 RADIO

tuner in your vehicle, the Band function will display the Satellite - Select Receiver serial number~ page 60, fig. 69 by
Radio option. rotating the control knob.
The Presets control button functions the same for all bands (FM, AM - Press the control knob. The ID number will appear on the
or Sirius)~ page 51.
MMI Display ~ fig. 62.

[i] Tips This number is a 12 character alphanumeric number. •

• Only one tuner module can be installed in a vehicle at a time.
App lies to veh icles: with Satellit e Digital Audio Radio Service
• Sirius and related marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite Radio
Inc. • Satellite station list
The available stations are listed in the satellite main
Applies 10 vehicles : with Satell ite Digita l Audio Radio Service menu.
Activate your Satellite Radio Service
In order to be able to receive satellite programs, this
service must be enabled.

Fig . 63 Radio: Sirius

Satellite Radio station
list

Fig. 62 Setup Radio - Press the (FMTAM] function button.

Sirius: Receiver serial
number - Select the desired radio station in the main Sirius radio
menu with the control knob.
In order to have the service enabled at your provider, you
need the ID number of the tuner. To show the ID number in If you are not in the main satellite radio menu (Radio Sirius) after
pressing the function button, you can change the frequency band
the display:
by operating the Band control button ~ page 47 or by repeatedly
- Press the !SETUP) function button in the satellite radio pressing the IFM TAM Ifunction button ~ page 15.
menu. Operating the Presets control button displays the presetlist. You
may store stations from the FM, AM and satellite radio (Sirius)
bands ~ page 51.
RADIO

The explanations for the sound settings start with section Briefly pressing the control knob selects the next available station.
=} page 77. If you hold the control knob down, the available stations will
advance or back up more quickly.

[i ) Tips
• The stations that are displayed in the station list can be filtered
according to your personal desires as to type of program =} page 61.
• If you operate the [RETURN! button in a sub menu, the Satellite
Radio main menu will be displayed. •
[i ) Tips
• Non selectable channels are automatically passed over when
searching channels and are not shown in the display.
• It depends on your provider whether the channel is covered. •

App lies to vehicles: with Satel lit e Digita l Aud io Radio Service
Tuning control button
Saving stations (STORE)
(Satellite Radio)
App lies to vehic les: w ith Satell ite Digita l Aud io Radio Service

Selecting radio stations

Fig. 65 Satellite Radio:

Store station

- Press the Tuning control button in the satellite radio

Fig. 64 Satellite Radio: menu.
Station forward
- Rotate and press the control knob to select the desired
- Press the Tuning control button in the satellite radio station frequency=> page 58.
menu. - By rotating and pressing the control knob, select STORE
- Select >I (Station forward)=> fig. 64 or I< (Stat ion back) in (Store station) => fig. 65.
the MMI Display by rotating the control knob. - Select your desired preset location by rotat ing the
- Press the control knob. control knob.
 RADIO I.
- Press the control knob. The station is saved in the Press the control knob to begin SCAN.
presetlist =>page 51.
Press the control knob again to stop the SCAN function.
Up to 25 stations from all three frequency bands => page 47 can be
All receivable stations are played for a few seconds.
saved in the presetlist => page 51.
To select the station that is currently being played, press the control
When you save a new station, an empty preset location will be
knob again. •
offered automatically. You can also choose any other preset loca-
tion.
App lies to veh icles: with Satellite Digital Audio Radio Service
In Setup Radio, you can delete an individual saved radio station or
all saved radio stations using the Delete radio presets function Entering a channel number
(=> page 56 and=> page 62!.
The desired station can also be selected by entering the
If your service provider changes the stations offered, stations in the channel number.
presetlist that are no longer available will be "greyed out". •

Appl ies to vehicles: with Satellite Digita l Audio Radio Service

Automatic station scan (SCAN)

Use the SCAN function to play each station you currently
receive for a moment.

Fig. 67 Satellite Radio:

Channel number

Fig. 66 Satellite Radio:

SCAN function

- Press the Tuning control button in the satellite radio

menu. Fig. 68 Satellite Radio:
Speller display .,_
- By rotating the control knob, select SCAN => fig. 66.

•• ••
RADIO

- Press the Tuning control button in the satellite rad io Th e following s ettin gs a re po ss ible in Setup Radio:
menu. • Sort station by ~ page 60

- By rotat ing the control knob , select CH-Nr. (Channel No.) • Station info ~ page 61
=>page 59, fig. 67. • Category fi lter ~ page 61
• Delete radio presets ~ page 62
- Press the co ntrol knob.
The ti me/date, sound and sett ings functions and the brightn ess of
- Ent er the channe l number via the Speller => page 59, the display can be adjusted using the control buttons~ page 160.
fig. 68.
- Select OK. [i ] Tips
We recommend that you enter these settings when the vehic le is
Once you have confirmed the entry of an available channel with OK,
stationary. Please note ~ page 10. •
t he assoc iated station is selected . •

App lies to veh icles: with Satellite Dig ital Audio Radio Service
Setup Satellite Radio Sorting stations
Stations can be sorted by name or channel number.
Opening and closing Setup
- Press the !SETUP] funct ion button in the satellite radio
menu.
Select Sort station by => fig . 69.
- Select Name or Channel no. => fig . 69.

Fig. 69 Set up Radio
Sirius: Sort stati on by
- In a Radio men u, press the [ SETUP] button to o pen the
ma in Setup menu f o r t he rad io func t ion =>fig . 69.
- Press the !SETUP ] button again to close the main Setup
menu again.
If you select "Sort station by" Name , the station categories a re list ed
in the main menu in alphabet ical order. Within the ind ividual cate -
gories the stations are listed by channel number in ascending order.
If you select "Sort station by" Channel no., the stations are listed by
channel number in ascending order.
[i ] Tips
The stations that are disp layed in the station list can be filtered
according to your personal desires as to type of program
~ page 61. •
 RADIO I.
Ap pl ies to vehicl es: wit h Satell ite Digit al Au di o Radi o Servi ce App lies to ve hicles: w ith Satell ite Dig ital Audi o Rad io Serv ice

Station info Category filter

The two-part informational text in the MM/ Display can be You can make a preselection in the program categories.
switched on and off

Fig. 71 Set up Radio

Sirius: Cate gory filte r
Fig. 70 Set up Rad io
Sirius: Stat ion info
Turning on filter option
Press the ! SETUP] function button in the satellite radio Press the ! SETUP ] f un ct ion button in t he sate llite radio
menu. menu.
- Selec t Station info. Select Category filte r.
- Select on or off ~ fig. 70 . Unde r Category filter select the desired filter option and
press the control knob . A check./ will appear aft er t he
If you have switched on St at ion info, two-part informa t ion is
displayed in the satel lite radio main menu . For example, the names filter opt ion .
of the artist and song are displayed:::::, page 57, fig. 63 . •
Turning off individual filter options
- Press the ! SET UP ] funct ion button in t he sat ellite radio
menu .
- Select Category filte r.
- Under Category filter select indiv idual filter options that
are not to be active any longer and press t he control
knob . The check./ after the filter opt ion d isappea rs. ~
RADIO

Tu r ning o ff all filte rs Ap plies to ve hicle s: w ith Satel lite Dig ita l Aud io Radio Service

- Press the !SETUP ] f unctio n butto n in the satellite radio System information
men u.
The fol lowing system messages can be disp layed :
- Select All cat egorie s and press the co ntrol knob so tha t a
check./ appears af te r All categorie s. The checks./ will S y stem m e s- M e aning
appear after each fi lter optio n. sa g es
- If you press the control knob again afterwords, the ANTENNA No ant enna is connected to the tuner , or
checks./ after all of the filter options disappear. there are loose p lug contacts on the
an t enna cable .
The stations tha t are disp layed in the st ation list can be filtered LINKING The tuner is presently not rece iving any
according to your personal desires as to type of program. The se lec-
tion of program categories depends on what your provider offers .
sate llite signal. •
If you select the opt ion All cate gorie s, all filter options are deacti -
vated and all availab le channels are d isplayed in the satellite station
list. •

Delete radio presets

The individual preset entries or all preset entries on the
presetlist can be deleted .
- Press the IS ETUP ] function button in the satellite radio
menu .
- Select Delete radio presets => page 61, fig . 70.
- Select Delete individually and selec t the sta t ion to be
de leted in the presetlist, or
- Selec t Delet e all entrie s. All entries on t he p resetlist are
de leted . •
 CD/AUX I.
CD/AUX

Introduction purchase adapter cables from your authorized Audi dealer or an

electronics store . •
Selecting Audio Source
Selecting CD function
CD functions can be selected using the CD function
button.

Fig. 72 CD/AUX: avail-

able audio sources

- Press the Source control button in a CD/AUX menu.

Fig. 73 MMI Display:
- Select and confirm the desired source. Main CD menu

Depending on vehicle equipment , the following choices are avail- - Press the [ CD/AUX) function button => page 15. A main
able: audio menu => fig. 73 or the previously active function
• CD ~ page 66 menu appears in the display.
• Audi music interface* ~ page 72 - Select CD => page 63 as source.
Various submenus are available, depending on the equipment
selected .
- Press one of the cont rol buttons => page 16 to move to
the appropriate submenus G) to © => fig. 73. .,

[i] Tips
• Each time you press the function key ICD/AUX] you change the
source.
• The audio source selected is shown in t he title line of the display .
• You connect your portable player (e.g. MP3 player) to the Audi
music int erface using special adapter cables ~ page 35. You can
CD / AUX

The following submenus are available in the CD The following submenus are available in the
function : 2
CD setup / MP3 setup > functi o n :

Control button CD setup / MP3 setup sub-

functions CD submenus menus
~ page 63 , fig . 73
Press the [SETUP] Repeat/mi x rangealbl
Audio CD Display CD te xtal
f u nct io n button in the
CD nameal CD function List displaybl
0 M P3 cobl ~ p age 69. Track information bl
CD list * ~ tab le on p age 64 CD ROM
Empty al This app lies to audio CDs.
CD un readable bl This app lies t o a M P3 CD that has been inserted into the CD change r*.

CD
Source Audi music interface* [i ] Tips
Balance • You can select a track from the CD title list using the multi-func-
Fader tio n steer ing whee l* in the inst rume nt cluster d isp lay~ pag e 68.
0 Treble • Each time you press the function key IC D/AUX ] you change the
Sound Bass so urce. •
~ page 77
ospcl BOSE
Vol ume sett ings
App li es to veh icles: w it h Audi mus ic interface
Forw ard Select Audi music interface
Reverse
Next
Previous
'-
CD control Sh uffle
SCAN
Name c o dl
INFO (Track inf or mat ionlbl

al This app lies to audio CDs with text and an MP3 CD that has been inserted Fig. 74 Display: Main
into the CD changer". menu inte rface
bl This appl ies to a M P3 CD that has been inserted into the CD change r*. (example of a folder
cl Digita l Signal Processing direct ory) ...
di This app lies to audio CDs.
21
The MP3 setup funct ion is ava ilable if a CD changer * has been instal led in
the vehicle.
 CD/AUX

- Connect a portable player to the Audi music inte rface bl Digita l Signal Processing

=> page 35.

The following submenus are available in the
- Press the ICD/AUX) function button => page 15. A main Interface setup function:
menu for audio=> page 64, fig. 74 or the last active menu
function appears in the MMI Display. Interface submenus

- Select Audi music interface as the source=> page 63. Press the [SETUPJ Repeat/mix rangeal
function button in
include subdirectoriesbl
- Press one of the control buttons=> page 16 to move to the
the appropriate sub menus G) to © => page 64, fig. 74. Interface function Track informational
~ page 74 Input level *cl
The following submenus are available in the Audi
music interface function: al Applies to an iPod connected via the iPod adapter cable or a portable player
connected via the USS/mini USB adapter cable.
bl Applies to a portable player connected via the USB/ mini USB adapter cable.
Control button
cl This applies to a player that is connected using a 3.5 mm jack plug adapter
functions cable.
Audi music interface submenus
~ page 64,
fig. 74

0 CD
Audi music interface*
rn Tips
• By using the multi-function steering wheel* and an iPod
Source al
connected by an iPod adapter cable, you can select iPod ~ page 74
Balance titles listed in the instrument cluster display.
Fader • Each time you press the function key ICD/AUXJ you change the
0 Treble
source . •
Sound Bass
~ page 77
ospbl BOSE
Volume settings
Forward
Reverse
Next
© Previous
Control
Shuffle
SCAN
Track information
al Applies to an iPod connected via the iPod adapter cable or a portab le player
connected via the USB/mini USB adapter cab le.

·-.,,- .. • •
CD/AUX

Main CD menu [i ] Tips

• You can view the CD track list in the instrument cluster display
Selecting a track
using the multi-function steering wheel*=> page 68.
• Because there are different methods for generating MP3/WMA
files, it is possible that MP3/WMA files might not be able to be
played or information might not be ab le to be read . You can find
additional information starting on=:> page 30. •

App lie s to veh icles: w ith CD changer

CD selection
Fig. 75 CD: Track
selection C D list CD 3 Source !

l
CU1 \'<"'·'' .-, rla
- Press the ICD/AUX) function button.
Select CD ::::,page 63 as source . ~ ®--- ~D; - ~i~e ~traits - Brothers in ...
C04 - ~!oe Cocker
- In the main CD menu, select the desired track on the
active CD with the control knob.

The playing time of the track will be displayed after the track name.
\
CD control
C'J5
COG
A,_,ci,o CD
Aud:u CD

1 2:00"" Sound
Fig. 76 CD: Selecting
CDs from the changer
A CD can be selected using the control button with the CD list func -
tion => page 66. - Press the CD list control button in the CD menu .
Whenever you load an MP3/WMA CD* in the CD changer*, the main - Select the desired CD ::::,fig. 76.
CD menu will display =:>fig. 75 the folder directory for the MP3/WMA
CD. - Select your track as necessary.
The MMI Display will show the file or title name of the MP3/WMA The selected CD location appears in the title line.
CD*=:> page 71. The track title will be displayed as soon as the
ID3/WMA tag has been read . This happens when playing individual
titles. [i ] Tips
The ID3/WMA tags that have been read for the last two MP3/WMA You can also change the CDs by pushing one of the CD position
CDs* that have been played will be stored in memory. That means buttons =>page 32. •
they are available for being played without having to be scanned
first.
 CD / AU X I.
CD contro l - To erase all the stored CD names, select NAMEG) and
t hen Delete all. Confirm with Yes to de lete all names. 3 )
To have information (e.g. art ist) about t he curren t t rack
on a MP3/WMA CD* that is in the CD changer * , turn and
press the control knob to select INFO (Track information)
0 -4)
G) R eve rs e within th e t rack
The track reverses for as long as you hold the control knob down.
Fig. 77 Aud io CD; Once you reach the beginning of the track, reverse stops and that
Contr ol whee l track st arts play i ng.

- As soon as the CD star t s playing, select t he control

button from the CD menu to get the CD cont rol function.
- To go forward or backward in the track, select> > 0 © Previou
(Forward) or<< G) (Reverse), and keep the control knob
pressed down.
- To play the next or the previous track, turn and press the
control knob to select >I ©
(Next) or I< © (Previous) .
- To scan t he trac ks, tu r n and press the contro l knob to
select SCAN ®·
- To play t he t racks in random order, tur n and press the
co ntrol knob to select MIX (Shuf fl e) @.
- To name a CD, turn and press the co ntrol knob to select
NAME 0-
Enter t he desired name using the Speller
=> page 26.3 )
- To erase a stored CD name, select NAME 0
and then
Delete CD name . Select the name you wish to delete. 3 >
0 Forward within th e tr a ck
The t rack p lays fo r as long as you hold t he control knob down.
s CD tra c k
If you press the but t on wi t hin 10 seconds aft er a track has st arted to
play, the previous track wi ll star t playing . Af t er 10 seconds it jumps
to the st art of the track .
© Ne xt CD tra c k
The next track will be played .
© S can C D tra c ks (S C AN )
Pressing the con t rol knob activates automatic track scan . Every title
on the CD wi ll be scanned and played for about 10 seconds .
By pressing t he but t on again, the scanning stops and the track tha t
was just being played will start over .
If you have set Repeat for a single Track in Setup , you canno t use the
Scan function. The function will b e grayed out .
Scanning will be deac t ivated if you select a t rack, go forward or
backward in a track , or select Random play.

31 This app lies to aud io CDs. 41 Th is appl ies to MP3/WMA CDs.

CD / AUX

© C D Shuffle (MI X) • You can use the multi-function steering wheel* to display the
The possibilities for the track mix function depend on the various current CD track list in the instrument cluster ~ page 68 .
sett ings availab le for Repea t/m ix range in the Set up menu • You can also use Arrow buttons on the MM I term inal screen
~ page 69/~ page 70. ~ page 17to switch to the next/previous track or to go forward or

If you set repeat in Setup for only a single CD, only the tracks on the backward within a track. •
current CD will be p layed in random order.
If you set Repeat / mi x range in Setup MP 3.,.for a Current list , the App lies to vehicles : with mul ti-func tion steer ing wheel

t racks on the current CD will be played in random order. Selecting a CD track in the instrument cluster
If you have set repeat in Setup for a single Track, you cannot use the display
track mix. The function will be "grayed out" . CD titles can be selected via the multi -function steering
If you t urned off the repeat function in Setup , all the tracks on the wheel.
current CD will be played in random order. As long as your vehicle is
equipped with a CD changer*, the next CD will be loaded after al l the
tracks on the current CD have been played.
n---- -==========--
---,.,-:§ ~Ir
Random play will be deactivated if you select a track or scan.

(D N a m e C D (NAME )3 l
The system stores the CD's name, even when you remove it from the
drive and play it again later from any slot.
There are some CDs that cannot be named for technical reasons.
Some CDs, for example, have already been given a name by the
manufacturer. In this case you cannot rename the CD.
You can name CDs, but no t individual tracks .

0 Tr a ck information (INF0 )* 4 )
-
7::=
~
:---..:
Fig. 78 Instrumen t
cluster display: CD
tr ack list

If any information has been stored in an ID3/WMA tag for the current
track (e.g. artist), you can have this information displayed using the
INFO function.
[i ] Tips
• Some f unctions apply to audio CDs and others are f or MP3/WMA
CDs·,.when they are in the CD changer*.
- Press the [ CD/AUX] function button in the MM I Terminal
if the CD is deactivated .
Select a CD in the MMI as needed using the control
button with the CD list function:::> page 66.
Press the [MODE] button on the multi -function steering
wheel :::>page 19 until the CD track list ~ fig. 78 is
displayed. _,
 CD/AUX

- Select a CD track by scrolling and pressing the left thum-
bwheel on the multi-function steering wheel.
If you have given the CDs names using the MMI => page 68 they will
also be shown in the instrument cluster display.
You can select a track in the MMI or in the instrument clus t er
display, there are no priorities set here. The last confirmed selection
rema ins active independent of the current opera t ion .
settings => page 71 for the title information => page 71 in the central
menu for the MP3* function setup .
The time/date, sound and settings functions and the brightness of
the display can be adjusted using the control bu t tons=> page 160.
[i] Tips
We recommend that you enter these sett ings when the vehicle is
stationary . Please note => page 10, "Notes on Traffic Safety" . •

[i] Tips
• If the navigation * display is up in the ins t rumen t cluster display Repeating audio CD (Repeat/mix range)
with an active CD source, and you wish to display a current audio One single track or all tracks on a CD can be repeated.
list , press the [MODE] button until the audio list is displayed.
• By pressing the trip computer reset button you can move from
the CD track list to the trip computer display. Detailed information
about the trip computer reset button can be found in your vehicle
Owner's Manual. •

Setup CD/Setup MP3*

Fig. 79 Setup CD:
Opening and closing Setup Repeat/mix range
audio CD

- In a CD menu, press the [SETUP)function button to open

- Select an audio CD => page 66.
the main Setup menu for the CD function => fig. 79 or the
MP3/WMA function. - As soon as the audio CD starts playing, press the [SETUP)
button in the CD menu.
- Press the [SETUP) button again to close the main Setup
menu again . Select Repeat/mix range => fig. 79.

If an audio CD is inserted, you can set the repeat options => page 69 - Select the desired setting .
and display the current track=> page 70 by going through the main
Function CD
menu's CD Setup.
The tracks on the current CD are repeated.
With anMP3/WMA CD* inserted in the CD changer,* you can deter-
mine the Repeat/Mix options ,* the list display => page 70 and

·-.,,- .. • •
CD/AUX

Function Track If you have set the function to Display CD Text , the display will show
The current track is repeated. CD Repeat will be displayed in the title the default names for individual CD tracks, e.g . "One World" and the
line. name of the CD, e.g. "Dire Straits -Brothers in ..." ~ page 66, fig. 75. •

Function off
App li es to vehic les: w ith CD changer
None of the above-mentioned repeat options are active.
Repeat MP3/WMA CD (Repeat/mix range)

[i ] Tips One s;ngle track or all tracks on a CD can be repeated.

If you want to use the Repeat function together with MIX (Shuffle),
please see the instructions for CD Shuffle ~ page 68. •

Display ing Text for an audio CD

CD track ;nformat;on prov;ded by the manufacturer can
be d;splayed.
Fig. 81 Setup MP3 :
Repeat/mix range
MP3/WMACD

- Select a MP3/WMA CD that has been inserted into the CD

changer => page 66.
- As soon as the MP3/WMA CD starts playing, press the
[SETUP] button in the CD menu.
Fig. 80 Setup CD: - Select Repeat .
Display CD text
- Select the desired setting.
- Select an audio CD~ page 66.
Function Track
- As soon as the audio CD starts playing, press the[SETUP] The MP3/WMA track currently selected will be repeated. CD Repeat
button in the CD menu. will be displayed in the title line.
- Select Display CD text ~ fig. 80. Function List
- Select on to display CD track title. The CD tracks that are currently displayed will be repeated .
 CD / AU X

Function CD Tra ck
The current MP3/WMA tracks wil l be repeated . Information about the t racks (e.g. artist , album, etc .) can be read
from a previous ly stored 1D3/WMA tag .
Fun ct ion off
The information must first be stored in the 1D3/WMA t ag, otherwise
None of the above -mentioned repeat options are active .
no information will be avai lable .
Whi le an MP3/WMA CD is play ing, the 1D3/WMA tag data for each
[i ] Tips respective track w ill be disp layed.
The settings for the repeat/mix range function also affect the track The 1D3/WMA tags that have been read for the last two MP3/WMA
mix function =:>page 68. • CDs will be stored in memory . That means they are available for
being played without having to be scanned first.
App lies t o vehicles: with CD chan ger
If there are no 1D3/WMA tags, or if they have not yet been read, no
MP3/WMA co - List display information about the tracks will be disp layed .
If t here are no 1D3 tags available, or if they have not been read, no
information about the tracks will be disp layed .

File
The name of the file will be displayed without any file extension. •

App lies to veh icles: w ith CD change r

Track Information
Fig. 82 Set up M P3:
List d isplay

- Select a MP3/WMA CD that has been inserted into the CD

changer => page 66.
- As soo n as the MP3/WMA CD starts playing, press the
[SETUP] button in the CD menu.
- Selec t List display .
Fig. 83 Set up M P3:
- Selec t File or Track => fig. 82. Track informat ion

- Selec t an MP3/WMA CD inserted into the CD changer

=> page 66.
CD / AUX

As soon as the MP3/WMA CD plays, select a CD menu and The track time (play time) is disp layed right after the name of the
press the function button [SETUP]. track .

Select Track information ~ page 71, fig. 83.

[i ] Tips
If information for the current track (e.g. ar t ist) is stored in the • You can use the multi -function steering whee l* to display the
ID3/WMA tag, it is disp layed in a pop -up for the track currently interface track list in the instrument cluster => page 74.
selected when t he function is on. •
• If information for the current track (e.g. artist) is stored in the
1D3/WMA tag, it is displayed in a pop-up for the track currently
selected when the function is on. •
Audi music interface
App li es to vehicles: with Audi musi c in terface and portab le p layer conn ecte d via an iPod or App lies to veh icles: w ith Aud i mus ic interface an d po rt ab le p layer con nected via an iPod o r
USB/mini USB ad apt er cable USB/mini USB ada pt er cab le

Selecting Tracks Audi music interface - Control

Fig. 84 Inter face: M ain Fig. 85 Interfac e:

menu Control wh eel

Press the Source control button in a CD/AUX menu. - Press the Control button on the Interfa ce menu.

Select Audi music interface as the source ~ page 63.
Use t he control kno b on the main menu's Interfa ce to
select a fo lder/track::::, page 66, fi g. 75.
The directory listing shown in the MMI Display matches the direc -
tory listing for the connected iPod . The MM I Disp lay wil l not show
any empty fo lders, nor will show the Compilations* folder that is
available on the iPod.
- To go forward or backward in the track, select >> @
(Forward) or << G) (Reverse), and keep the control knob
pressed down.
- To play the next or the previous track, turn and press the
control knob to select >I © (Next) or I< © (Previous).
To scan t he tracks, turn and press the contro l knob to
select SCAN G).

- To play the tracks in random order, turn and press the
contro l knob to select MIX (Shuffle) ®·
- In order to disp lay information about t he current track
(e.g. artist), turn and press the control knob to select
INFO (Track informat ion) 0-
0 Reve rse within the tr a ck
The track reverses f or as long as you hold the contro l knob down .
Once you reach the beginning of the track, reverse stops and that
track starts p lay ing.
0 Forward wi t hin the tra c k
The track p lays for as long as you hold the control knob down .
© Previ o u s track
If you press the button within 10 seconds after a track has started to
play, the previous track w ill start playing. After 10 seconds it jumps
to the start of the track.
© Ne x t track
The next track will be p layed.
© Sca n tr ack s (SC AN )
Pressing the contro l knob activates automatic track scan. Every
track on t he CD wil l be scanned and played for about 10 seco nds.
By pressing the button again, the scanning stops and the track that
was just being p layed wil l sta rt ove r.
If you have set Repeat / mix range for a single Track in Setup
Interfa ce, you cannot scan . The function wil l be "grayed out" .
Scanning wi ll be deact ivated if you select a track, go fo rward or
backward in a track, or select random play.
·-.,,- ..
CD / AU X
@ Shuffl e (MI X)
The possibi lities for random p lay depend on the various settings
avai lable for Repeat/ mix range in th e Set up Interface menu
=> page 75.
If you have selected Repeat / mix range in Setup Interf ace for a List,
the tracks on the current playlist wil l be p layed in random order.
If you have set Repeat/ mix range for a single Track in Setup
Interface , you cannot use Shuff le. The funct ion wi ll be "g rayed out ."
If you have set Repeat to off in Interfa ce Setup , the track mix is
created from all tracks on the connected iPod .
If an i Pod is connected via the iPod adapter cable* to the Audi music
interface , a shuffled track list is displayed in the MMI and is p layed
in the sequence shown.
If a USB storage medium is connected via the USB/mini USB adapter
cable, a shuffled track list is not shown in t he MMI, the selection
cursor jumps around within the track list .
Random play will be deactivated if you select a track or scan.
0 Tr a c k Info r mati o n (INFO )
If any information has been stored in an ID3 tag for the current track
(e.g . artist), you can have t his information disp layed using the INFO
function.
[i ] Tip s
• You can use the multi -function steering whee l* to disp lay the
current Interface track list in the instrume nt c luster => page 74.
• You can also use the Arrow buttons on the MMI terminal screen
=> page 17 to switch to the next/prev ious track or to go forward or
backward within a track. •
• •
CD/AUX
App lie s to vehicles: w ith Aud i music in terface and port able p layer connected via an iPod or
USB/mini USB adapter cab le and mu lti-fu nction steering whee l
Selecting the iPod t rack list in the instrument
cluster display
Fig. 86 Instrument
cluster display: Track
list Interface
- Press the [ CD/AUX) function button in the MMI Terminal
if the Interface is deactivated.
- If necessary, press the control button with the Source
function and select Audi music interface => page 63. The
iPod track list will be displayed on the MMI Display.
Press the [MODE] button on the multi-function steering
wheel => page 19 until the iPod track list => fig. 86 is
displayed.
- Select an iPod track by rolling and pressing the left menu
thumbwheel on the multi-function steering wheeL
You can select the iPod track in the MMI Display or in the instrument
cluster display. The last confirmed selection is active, no matter
which method was used to activate it.
[i ] Tips
• If the navigation* display is up in the instrument cluster display
with an active Interface source, and you wish to display a current
audio list, press the IMODE] button until the audio list is displayed,
or roll the right menu thumbwhee l.
• You can continue to scroll through the display on the instrument
cluster and on the MMI Display screen by using the left menu thum-
bwheel located on the multi -function steering wheel. •
Setup Interface
App li es to vehic les: w ith Audi music inter face
Opening and closing Setup
- In an Interface menu, press [SETUP) function button to
open the main Setup menu for the Interface function
=> page 75, fig. 87.
- Press the [SETUP] button again to close the main Setup
menu again.
If a portable player is connected via the iPod adapter cable* or
USB/mini USB adapter cable,* the repeat/mix options:::::, page 35
and track information :::::,page 75 can be set :::::,page 75 in the central
menu for the setup interface.
Using a portable player connected to a 3.5 mm phone jack adapter
cable*, you can set the input level :::::,page 76 in the Interface Setup's
main menu .
The time/date, sound and settings functions and the brightness of
the display can be adjusted using the control buttons :::::,page 160. ..,
 CD / AU X

Fun c ti o n List
[i ]Tips The tracks in t he current playlist are repeated . With t rack shuffle, the
We recommend that you enter these settings when the vehicle is tracks in the current playlist are played in random order.
stationary . Please note ~ page 10, " Notes on Traffic Safety". •
If you have connected a portable player via a USB/ mini USB adapter
cabl e, selecting List will allow you to set the func t ion include
Ap pli es to ve hicles: with Audi music interface and p orta ble player connec ted via an iPod o r subdirectorie s . The tracks in the subfolders for the current playlis t
USB/mi ni USB adap ter cab le
are repeated.
Repeat function (Repeat/mix range)
Fun cti o n Off
One single track or all tracks on the current list can be None of the above -mentioned repeat options are active.
repeated.

[i ] Tips
• The settings for the repeat/mix range also affect the track mix
function ~ page 73.
• If t he random play function is active and you change the repeat
option from List to off, t he track tha t is current ly playing wi ll be
interrupted and a new track will be chosen at random. •

Fig. 87 Setup Inter- Ap p lies to veh icles: w ith Au d i mus ic inte rface and p ort ab le p layer co nne cted v ia an iPod o r
face: Repeat/m ix range USB/mi ni USB ad apter c able

Track information
Requ irement : A portab le player is connecte d via an iPod
adapte r cable ~ page 37 or a USB/m ini USB ada pter cab le
~ page 39 .

Press the ! SETUP ) but t on on the Interface menu.

- Select Repeat/ mix range .
- Select the desired setting .

Fun c tion Track Fig . 88 Setup Inter -

The track currently selected will be repeated . Int erface Repeat will face: Track infor mat ion ~
d isp lay in th e t itl e line .

•• ••
CD/AUX

Requirement: A portable player is connected via an iPod
adapter cable => page 37 or a USB/mini USB adapter cable
=> page 39.
- In an interface menu, press the function
- Select Track information.
If information for the current track (e.g. artist) is stored in the
ID3/WMA tag, it is displayed in a pop -up for the track currently
selected when the function is on. •
You can adapt the portable player 's volume to the volume from the
MMI system's Audio sources when it is connected via the 3.5 mm
phone jack adapter cable.
If the output sound level for the connected device is too high, it
key !SETUP].
might influence audio quality (distortion). If this happens, turn the
output sound level down on your portable player . We recommend
adjusting the portable player's sound level to about 70 percent of
the maximum possible volume. •

Applies to vehicl es: wit h an Au di music interface and a portab le playe r conne cted to a 3.5
m m p hone ja ck adapte r cab le

Input level
Adapt the Input level using a portable player connected
via the 3.5 phone jack adapter cable.

Tin1e/Date Setup AUX s.,ttinc1, 1

Input level

-
--
'

,
.I I - -
- -

\
Display
-,
• •+
12 :00 AM
- -

Sound
Fig. 89 Setup AUX:
Input level

- Press the [SETUP ] button on the Interface menu.

- Select the Input level.
- To adapt the player's input level, turn and press the
control knob.
 Adju s tin g s o und s e ttin gs

Adjusting sound settings

Setting basic sound characteristics - Confirm your setting by pressing the control knob.

Individual sound adjustments can be made. The MMI Display ~ fig. 91 shows the degree of adjustment.
The following sound adjustments are possible:
• Balance !left/right volume relationship)
• Fader (front/rear sound relationship)
• Treble
• Bass
• DSP5) BOSE
• Volume settings for other functions (Navigation info*, Audio
Fig. 90 Sound: Setting with Nav note*, Broadcast alert, Speech dialog system* and Tele-
t he balance phone volume*)
Treble and bass settings are valid for the type of operation you are
MPn101y Rad io FM BiHHI
currently in . The balance and fade settings are independent of the
Balance type of operation.
If you change the bass setting, for example, when playing a CD, it
I, - , will not affect radio operation. •
. I - -

-
- -

\
lllf)lllq
-,
lflft
•
1 2:00""'
--
•nght
J
Sound
Fig. 91 Sound: Balance
adjustment

- Press the co ntrol button f or the Sound function from an

audio or setup menu.
- Sele ct the desired so un d setting (e.g. Balan ce) =>fig. 90
with t he con t rol knob.
- Rotate the speci fi c control knob in the sound adj ustment
me nu (e.g. Balan ce) => fig. 91 t o set the sound charac t er-
istic to your liking. Sl Digita l Signal Processing
Adju sting s ound s e ttings

Digital Signal Processing (DSP) - Rotate the contro l knob to set the level of the th ree-
dimens ional sound characteristics.
BOSE®
M ore sound settin gs can be made wi th the DSP BOSE. AudioPilot
- Press t he co ntr ol butto n for the Sound functi o n f rom an
audio or set up men u.
- Select DSP BOSE.
- Select AudioPilot ~ fig. 92 .
- Select on to o bta in dynamic driv in g soun d compensa -
t ion .
Fig. 92 Sound : DSP
BOSE - adjustment Sound set
option s
In Sound set you can adj ust the sound characteristics individually .
The surround settings create a thre e-dimensional sound effect in
Sound set
the area.
- Press t he contro l button for the Sound function from an
aud io or setup menu. Surround le v el
This sett ing is avai lab le for the CD func t ion as we ll as the Sate lli t e
- Select DSP BOSE. Digita l Audio Radio Service * . The ratio of bass and treble in t he
- Selec t Sound set ~ fig. 92. th ree-dimensiona l sound characteristics can be set using the
adjuster in the MMI Display.
- Rotate the contro l knob to the des ir ed sound playback .
Audi o Pilot (D y nami c dri v ing so und c omp e n sa tion )
Surround level This system uses a m icrophone to recognize changes in i nte ri or
noise. It changes music playback automat ical ly so that the music is
- Press t he contro l button for the Sound function from an
neither overpowe red by noises nor set too loudly . No matter what
audio or setup menu . kind of ambien t noise you have in the vehicle, the mus ic playback
- Selec t DSP BOSE. level remains the same . •

- Selec t Sound set surround fr (sur round fron t ) or surround

rear .
- Select Surround level ~ fig. 92 .
 Adjusting sound settings I.
Volume settings of other functions You can adjust the volume of the active audio source during a navi-
gation voice message announcement with Audio with Nav note .
The volume of other functions can be adjusted.
Adjust the basic announcement volume for the Speech dialog
system.
For Telephone mode, adjust the voice output volume. •

Fig. 93 Sound: Volume

settings of other func-
tions

- Press the control button for the Sound function from an

audio or setup menu.
- Select Volume settings.
- Select the desired option ~ fig. 93.
Turn the control knob to the des ired volume level.

The volume of other functions events can be adjusted:

• Broadcast alert
• Navigation info*
• Audio with Nav note *
• Speech dialog system*
• Telephone volume *
In case of an emergency, an acoustic broadcast alert will be trig-
gered by the radio station tuned in and will be displayed in the MMI.
A test announcement is played while the volume is being adjusted
for Navigation voice messages . For this, a navigation DVD must have
been inserted into the DVD navigation drive => page 32.

•• ••
NAME (dir e ctory )

NAME (directory)

Introduction Th e fo llo w in g s u bm e nu s a re avai la b le in t h e name

f un c ti o n :
Selecting NAME function (directory ) Control button
Using the INAME] function button, a user-specific direc- functions Name submenus
~ fig . 94
tory con be created.
© Import from phone book
Import
Call*
© Start route g uidance to *
Options
New entry
© Change entry
Edit
Copy entry
Delete entry
Fig. 94 MM I Display: Memory capacity
M ain nam e menu

Th e f oll o wi ng s ubm e nu is av a ila bl e in th e n a m e set up

- Press the !NAME ) function button ~ page 15. The main f un c ti o n :
name menu (directory) ~ fig . 94 or the previous active
directory funct ion me nu appears in the MMI Display. Name setup submenu

Press the [SETUP! Delete directory

- Press one of the control buttons ~ page 16 to move to
the appropr iate sub menus G) to 0
~ fig. 94. function button i n the
name function
~ page89

[i ] Tip s
You can read detailed information about the Return button and the
function and control buttons starting at ~ page 12. •
 NAME (dir ec t o ry)

Main directory menu You can select individua l entries from th is list to recall or to change
the stored dat a (e.g . telephone number, navigation destination). •
Searching directory entry
Starting from the main name menu, directory entries can Import control button
be administered.
App lies to veh icles: with cell phone pack age and cell phone crad le

Import from cell phone

Individual entries or all entries on the cell phone can be
imported into the directory.

Fig. 95 MMI Display:

M ain name menu

- Press the (NAME ) f unct ion butto n.

- Select t he ent ry from t he li st, or
- Selec t Find entry .
- Enter the name (last name) you are looking for over the
speller => page 25, or
- Selec t LIST in t he speller and select the entry from the
list. The d irectory card w ith all t he stored dat a is
displayed .
It is not absolutely necessary to enter a name in ful l to find it, but
this can reduce t he size of the entry selection provided .
New dir ectory entries can be creat ed using the New entry function
in the Edit => page 84 submenu or via Imp ort of data from the cell
phone => page 83 . All existing directory entries are listed in the main
name menu .
Fig. 96 Directo ry:
Im port from phone
book
In a directory me nu , press t he Import control button.
- Select the entry from the list , or
- Select Find entry => fig. 96 and select the entry to be
imported usi ng the speller, or
- Select Import all entries . All ent r ies on t he cell phone are
added to the directory .
Phone book entries imported from the cell phone are filed as new
d irectory cards. Each d irectory card contains data fields to store
data on the person, on their address and for communication with
this person . These data can also be used for navigation* . ~
NAME (dir ec to ry)

If there is not enough memory capacity in the directory to import al l

cell phone entries, you are shown a message to this effect in the
MM I Display. You can import cell phone entries to f ill the rema ining
available memory space or cancel th e procedure .

[i ] Tip s
You can display the amount of memory capacity availab le for t he
directory in the directory submenu Edit using the M emo ry cap acity Fig. 98 Directory :
function =:>page 86. • Gene rat e new e ntry

- In a directory menu, press the Edit control button .

Edit control button
Select New entry => f ig. 97.
Generating new entries in the directory Select Last name => fig. 98 and enter a name using the
For an entry in the directory, it is first necessary to enter speller =>page 25.
the name. - Select OK in the speller to confirm your entry.
Select additional dat a fie lds t o enter the desire d data .

Entries in the direc t ory are filed as directory cards . In order to be

able to store a directory card, it is necessary to enter a name . Each
directory card contains data fie lds to store data on the person, on
their address and for communication with this person . These data
can also be used for navigation * .
By selecting a data fie ld, a speller is automatically activated
Fig. 97 Directory: New =:>page 25which allows letters and numera ls to be entered.
entry

[i ] Tips
You can import existing telephone numbers from the telephone
number lists ("Received calls", "Dia led numbers", "Missed calls" or
from the "Cell phone") as needed=:> page 86. If there are no tele-
phone numbers in the lists, the functions are shown "g reyed ou t "
and cannot be selected. •
 NAME (dir ec t o r y)

Changing a directory entry

[i ] Tips
- In a directory menu, press the Edit control button . Voice ent ries for directory cards assigned with the speech dialog
system * are not copied . •
- Select Change entry => page 84, fig. 97.
- Select t he entry from the list, or Deleting directory entries
- Select Find entry and select the desired entry using the Individual entries or all entries in the directory can be
speller. The directory card with all the stored data is delete d.
displayed.
- Make yo ur revisions.

By selecting a data field, a speller is automatical ly activated

=>page 25which allows letters and numerals to be entered.
The speller also offers an Import * function to input telephone
numbers with which the contents from other te lephone number
lists can be copied into this data field =>page 86. •
Fig. 99 Directory:
Delete entry
Copy a directory entry
Del et e individual e ntri e s
- In a directory menu, press the Edit control button.
In a directory menu, press t he Edit control button .
- Select Copy entry => page 84, fig. 97.
Select Delete entry => page 84, fig. 97 .
- Select t he ent ry f rom t he li st , or
Select the entry from the list, o r
- Sele ct Find entry and select the desired entry using the
Select Find entry => fig. 99 and select the entry to be
speller. A copy is made of the select ed direc t ory card.
deleted using the speller.
You can recognize the copied entry by the descr i ptor (Copy ) af ter - Confirm Would you like to delete this entry? with Yes. The
the name, e. g. Willi ams (Copy). The data on the directory card can
selected directory entry is deleted.
now be changed ~ page 85.
Delete all entries
- In a d irectory me nu , press t he Edit con t rol button.
NAME (directory)

- Select Delete entry=> page 84, f ig. 97. App lie s to veh icles: with cell p hone package and cell ph o ne cradle

Importing telephone numbers into the

- Select Delete all entries=> page 85, fig. 99.
directory
- Confirm Are you sure you want to delete all entries from
the directory? w ith Yes. All d irectories entr ies are
deleted.

[i ]Tips
A directory entry can also be deleted through the main menu
=>page 83 aft er the directory card has been opened usi ng the
Delete this entry function. • Fig. 100 Directory:
Speller with import
function
Memory capacity
The number of entries stored and the available memory
capacity con also be displayed .
- In a directory menu, press the Edit co ntrol button .
- Select Memory capacity ==>page 84, f ig. 97. The memory
capacity of the directory is displayed.
Fig. 101 Directory:
Up to 150 directory cards can be stored in the di rectory. • Import from - Received
calls

- Press the [ NAME ) function button.

- Select an existing entry==> page 83 or create a new entry
==>page 84.
- Select Telephone or Mobile. The number spelle r is
d isplayed.
- Select Import G) in the speller ==>fig . 100.
- Select Received calls, Dialed numbers, Missed calls or
Cell phone ==>fig. 101. ~
 NAME (dir ec t o ry)

- Select a telephone number from the list.

After you have selected a telephone number by rotating and

pressing the control knob, the MM I Disp lay automatically switches
back t o the directory card .

If th e f un cti o n s a re s h o w n "g reyed o u t" a nd ca nn o t b e

se lec t e d , c h eck th e foll o wing :
• Is your cell phone * inser t ed i n t he cell phone cradle and Fig. 103 Directory:
sw itched on => page 93or is your Bluetooth cell phone connected to Store dest ination
the MMI through Bluet ooth => page 95.
• Are te lephone numbers avai lable in the telephone number list of - Press the [ NAME ) f un ction button .
your cell phone.
- Select an existing entry => page 83 or create a new entry
=> page 84.
[i ]Tips - Select Nav. destination (business) o r Nav. destin ation
Depending on the cell phone being used and t he cell phone
(private ).
prov ider, it is possible t hat you do not have the import function
available . • - Enter the data for the navigation destination, or
- Select Retrieve from last destinat. by rota t ing and
App lies to vehicles: w ith Navigat ion system
pressing the contro l knob => fig . 102 to import t he data
Setting up navigation destination for a from one of t he previous navigation destinations.
directory entry
- Select as required Display as top destination => fig . 103
to display the nav igation destination in the main naviga -
t ion menu => page 136.
- Select Stor e destination . The destination entered is
stored on the directory card.

After the destination has been stored, you return to the directory
card and can enter additional data as need ed.
Fig. 102 Directory:
You can assign two navigation destinat ions to each directory card .
Retrieve from last
destinat ions You can open these st ored navigation dest inations through t he
navigation Load from directory function => page 138. .,_
NAME (dir e ctory )

If t he Display as top destination function shows a check mark./ Independent of the data on the directory card, you can st ore a freely
=} page 87, fig. 103 after it, this function is active . These navigation selectable spoken designation in the speech dialog system. This
dest inations are shown in t he main navigation menu =} page 136 spok en designation is called name tag in this manua l.
under the menu item Start route guidance . •
When you have assigned a name tag to a directory card, you listen
to this name tag using the Play name tag func t ion. In addition, yo u
Appl ies to vehicles: with multi-function steering wheel and speech dia log system can delete the name tag assigned to the open directory card using
Playing or deleting a name tag the Delete name tag function. The stored data on the directory card
remain unchanged.

[i ] Tips
You can find more detai led information about name tags start i ng in
=} page 169. •

Options control button

Fig. 104 Directory:
App lies to vehicles: with cell phone package and cell phone crad le
Play name t ag
Calling a directory entry
Play name tag
Press the !NAME) f unct ion button .
- Selec t an exist ing entry=> page 83.
Select Play name tag => fig. 104. The name tag you
assigned to this dir ectory card is played.

Delete name tag

- Press the !NAME) f unct ion button . Fig. 105 Directory : Call
entr y
- Selec t an exist ing entry=> page 83.
In a dir ectory menu, press the Options cont rol button .
- Selec t Delete name tag => fig. 104. The name tag you
assigned is de leted. - Select Call => fig. 105 .
- Select the entry from the list, or
 NAME (dir ec tory)

- Select Find entry and select the entry using the spe ll er. has been selected, the MM I Display readout automat ical ly switches
to the Navigation f unction and route guidance is star t ed . •
- Selec t t he desired telephone number from t he Business
or Private catego r ies . The selected number is dialed .

If several te lephone numbers are stored for one person, all of them
Setup Directory
are presented in the selection. After a telephone number has been
selected, the MM I Display reado ut automatica lly switches to t he Opening and closing Setup
Telephone function and t he number is dia led. •
- In a di rec t ory me nu , press the [SETUP )f u nct ion button to
App lies to vehicles: wit h N avigation system
open the ma in Set up menu for the directory function
=>page 90, fig . 107.
Navigating to a directory entry
- Press the [SETUP) button again to close the main Setup
menu again.

In Setup Nam e, all directory entr ies can be deleted => page 90.
The time/date, sound and settings functions and the brightness of
the di splay can be adjusted using the control buttons => page 160.

Fig. 106 Directory :

[i ] Tips
Select navigati on We recommend t hat you enter these settings when t he veh icle is
destinat ion st ationary . Please note => page 10, " Notes on Traffic Safety" . •

- In a directory menu, press the Options control b utton .

- Sele ct Start route guidance to => page 88, fig. 105.
- Select t he ent ry from t he li st, or
- Select Find entry and select the entry using the speller .
- Select t he desired naviga ti on dest in ation f rom the
Business or Private categories. The route to the selected
destination is calc ul ated .

If several navigation destinations are stored for one person, all of

them are presented in the selection . After a navigation destination

·-.,,- .. • •
NAME (directory )

Deleting all directory entries

All di rectory entrie s can be deleted.

Fig. 107 Setup Direc-

tory: Delete direct ory

- Press the ISETUP! function button in t he directory me nu.

- Select Delete directory ~ fig . 107.
- Confirm Are you sure you want to delete all entries from
the directory? with Yes. All directories entr ies are
deleted. •

Cell phone package
Introduction
Appl ies to vehicles: wi th cell phon e package an d cell p hon e cradle
General
The hands- free in stallation in the vehicle can be used w ith
a cell ph one through th e fac tory -ins talled cell ph one
package.
The factory -instal led cell phone package is located in the center
armrest . It all ows yo u t o con nect particu lar GSM o r CDMA cell
phones in the vehic le using special phone crad les=> page 92. Cell
phones wi t h Blueto ot h support can also be wireless ly connected to
the cel l phone package via Bluetooth => page 95.
If you use a GSM cell phone, the entries available on the SIM card
and in the cel l pho ne add ress book are saved in the cell phone
package. If you use a CDMA cell phone, the availab le phone book
entries are saved in the cell phone package . Up to 1000 phone book
entries from four different cell phones can be saved in the cel l
phone package => page 105.
You can purchase cell phone cradles from your Audi dea ler or a
qualified electronics store .
Depending on the cell phone being used, it can happen that the
telephone functions are not shown in the MMI Display. If your cell
phone do es not provide t he telep hone f unctio ns of the cel l p ho ne
package as described, they cannot be executed over the MM I.
& WARNING
• Make sure that all persons ma intain a minimum dist ance of 15
cm from the antenna, in accordance with the certification guide -
line for mobile HF tran smitters.
·-.,,- ..
Cell phone package
& WARNING (continued )
• Pay attention first and foremost to your driving ! As the driver,
you have total responsibility for operating the vehicle safely.
Therefore , when using the functions, make certain that you have
complete control of your vehi cle in all traff ic situat ions!
• The speech dialog system * should not be used in emergencie s,
since the voice can change in stressful situ ations . The result can
be that the desired telephone connection does not go through
under certain circum stan ces or does not go through quickly
enough . Dial the emergency number manually.
0 Note
• Observe all app li cable laws f o r making te leph o ne cal ls in vehi -
cles,
• Switc h off your cell pho ne i n areas in which the use of cel l
phones is prohib ited .
• Switch off your cell phone in locat ions where there is a danger of
exp losions. These locations are not always c lear ly identified . They
i nclude, for exam p le, fi ll ing stat ions, storage o r transp o rtati o n faci l-
ities for fuel or chemica ls; locations where there is fue l vapor in the
air (e.g. escapi ng propane or f uel vapors in vehicles or bui ldings) or
locations where there are chemicals or large quantities of dust
part icles (e.g . fr om flour or wood) in the air . This also app lies to all
other locations where you norma lly switch off your car's engine.
[i ] Tips
• If according ly equipped , your vehicle is fitted with a hands -free
insta llation and audio muting .
• The telephone functions described depend on the compatibility
of the cell phone with t he cel l phone package, and w hethe r or not
your cell phone service provider supports these functions . ~
• •
C e ll ph o n e p ac kag e

• With ce ll phones , there may be techn ically related interference The following c ontr o ls are available if the vehicle is
wh ich can impair th e performanc e of the device . ac c ordingly equipped :
• Reception may be impaired in covered areas, such as, for • Operation us ing t he control but tons or the control knob in the
example, in a tunnel or an underground garage. te lephone menu => page 96.
• There may be areas without network coverage provided by cell • !MODE i button 0
and thumbwheels G) on the multi-function
phone operators. The tele p hone cannot be used there. steering wheel ·~=> fig . 108.
• If your vehic le is not equipped wi t h the docking cradle or a cell • Talk Button 61 @ on the multi -function steering wheel* => fig . 108
phone, please contact your authorized Audi dealer to purchase for the spe ech dialog system *=> page 165.
these items.
• Use on ly original par t s from the Audi accessories progra m. Oper -
ation of the cell phone package wi t h cell phone c radles and cell
[i ] Tips
The basic telephone functions are on ly availab le at the multi -func -
phones not approved by t he manufacturer is not permitted . •
tion steering wheel* if the vehicle was equipped with t he phone at
the factory. •
Appli es to vehi cles: wit h m ulti -func ti on steering wh eel, cell p hone pack age and cell phon e
cradle
App lies to vehicles: w ith cell pho ne package an d cell phone crad le
Controls
Cradle installation and removal
The individual telephone func ti ons can be performe d
usi ng differen t contr ols. The cell phone cradle must be placed in the cradle
moun ting base in the vehicle .

Fig. 10 8 M ult i-fu nc-

t ion steering w heel: Fig. 109 Cente r
Contr ols arm rest : Cradle
mountin g base

61 This button is inoperative if the "speech dia log system " is not insta lled.
 Cell phone package I·
. ...........
. [i] Tips
• To prevent system interference, be certain that the cell phone
cradle is properly secured .
• The cell phone cradle used depends on the particular cell phone
model and may diffe r from the version shown in the illustration . •

App lies to veh icles: with cell p hone pack age and cell phone cradl e

Inserting/removing the cell phone

Fig. 110 Cradle
mounting base in the
center armrest: Instal-
lation of the cradle
.. ---·--·
·----
Installing the cradle
- The cradle mounting base G) => fig. 110 is permanently
installed in the vehicle.
- Open the center armrest @ => page 92, fig. 109.
- Push the cell phone cradle 0 => fig. 110 with the retainer
into the guide tab of the cradle mounting base G).
Fig. 111 Center
- Engage the cell phone cradle 0 by pressing down on the armrest: Inserting the
cell phone IJ),
rear section.

Removing the cradle

- Open the center armrest @ => page 92, fig. 109.
- Remove the cell phone from the cradle => page 93.
- Pull the cell phone cradle carefully up out of the retainer
by the rear section.

0 Note
Remove the cell phone cradle only when necessary to prevent
damage to it.
C e ll ph o n e p ac kag e

. ···-··-··
···--.......
& WARNING
Check to be sure the cell phone is properly secured in th e cradle .
In an accident , an improp erly engaged cell phone can be thr own
fr om th e cradle and injure vehicle occupants.

0 Note
An improperly secured cell phone can fa ll out during vehic le opera -
tion and be damaged .
Fig. 112 Center
armrest : Removing th e
cell phone [i ] Tips
• In order to be able to use the Bluetooth link to the MMI, the cell
Requirement : The cell pho ne cradle has been installed phone has to be connected one time to the cel l phone package
=> page 92. ~ page 95.

Inserting
Place the cell phone in the cradle => page 93, fig. 111.
Press the cell phone into the reta iner unt il it engages.
The cell phone is connected to the mobile phone antenna
and the battery is being charged.
R e moving
Press the release button ® => fig . 112.
Remove the cell phone by lifting up.
If you place the cell phone in the cradle or remove it during a phone
call, this may interrupt the voice transmission or cause the call to be
disconnected.
In order to use the wireless link through Bluetooth, you need a cel l
phone that supports the Bluetooth function~ page 95.
• When you p lace the cell phone in the cell phone cradle, the
connection over the interface in the cradle kit is completed and the
Bluetoo t h connec t ion is broken 71.
• Electromagnetic fields can result from using radio devices inside
the vehicle .
- Always operate a radio device using an exterior antenna . This
also applies to radio devices with Bluet ooth operation. The ext e-
rior antenna directs the electromagnetic fie lds outside and the
streng t h of the fie lds ins ide the vehicle decreases in comparison
to operation without an exterior antenna.
- Make sure that a retrofit exterior antenna is instal led
correctly . •

71 W ith some commerc ial crad le kits, the Bluetooth connection is not broken.

Ap plies to vehicl es: w ith cell phon e package and Bluetooth cell phon e cradle and m ulti-
fun cti on steeri ng wh eel
Bluetooth™
8/uetooth technology is used for cordless connection of a
cellular telephone to the MM/ in the vehicle.
Fig. 113 Telephone :
Number (wit h Blue-
tooth symbol)
The cell phone 8 l must be connected one time to the cell
phone package when the vehicle is stationary. Depending
on the cell phone being used, different steps are required
for this procedure . After switching on the ignition, you have
five minutes to connect your phone to the cell phone
package .
- Make sure that no other cell phone is current ly
connected to the cell phone package through a Blue -
tooth connect ion.
- Switch on the ignition and, if needed, the MMI.
- Sw itch on your cell phone and, if needed, enter the
correct PIN.
- Select the menu option on the cell phone which looks for
Bluet ooth-capab le dev ices (cell phone package).
81 Pl ease note that the ce ll phone suppo rt s hands-free .
·-.,,- ..
Cell phone package
- Connect the cell phone to the cell phone package you
f ind . Your cell phone package logs in with the cell phone
under the name Audi UHV.
- Enter the Bluetooth PIN for the cell phone package within
30 seconds. The Blue tooth PIN is 1234.
- Wait until your cell phone shows that the connection has
been established. The Blueto oth symbol G) =>fig. 113 is
disp layed .
In order t o safeguard against unauthorized access t o your cell
phone , you should change the Bluetooth PIN via t he BT PINfunction
=> page 108.
A ma xi mum of four cell phones
You can connect up to four cell phones to the cell phone package.
However , only on e cell phone at a time is active ly conn ect ed to the
cel l phone package. If a fifth cel l phone is connected to the cell
phone package , the device which has not been used in conjunction
with the cell phone package for the longest time is disconnected.
Making and breaking a connection
An operational cell phone that was connected to the cel l phone
package is recogni zed automatica lly aft er the ignit ion is switched
on. For some cell phones you have to activate the connection.
The Bluetooth connection is disconnected after the ignition is
switched off. If you place the cell phone in the cradle , the Bluetooth
connection is also disconnected with most normal cel l cradles.
Range
The Bluetooth connect ion from cel l phone to cell phone package is
limited to the interior of the vehicle. It depends on loca l conditions,
such as obstacles between the devices , and on interference from
other devic es. For example, if your cell phon e is in a jacket pock et,
this may affect detection of the cell phone or transmiss ion of data. ~
• •
Cell phone package

Telephone operation
& WARNING
• Please devote your full attention to driving! As the driver, you App li es to vehi cles: with cell phone package an d cell p ho ne crad le
hold complete responsibility for safety in traffi c. Only use the func- Selecting telephone function
tions in such a way that you always maintain complete control
over your vehicle in all traffi c situations . The p ossib le M M/ teleph on e f uncti on s dep end on the cell
• During air transport , the Bluetooth function for the cell phone ph on e bein g used.
package must be swit ched off by a qualified dealership .

[i ) Tips
• The Bluetooth symbol is not d isplayed in the status bar in every
case; th is depends o n the cell pho ne yo u use.
• Electromagnetic fields can result from using radio devices inside
t he veh icle.
- Always operate a radio device using an exterior antenna . This Fig. 114 MMI Display:
also ap plies to radio devices w ith Bluetooth operatio n . The exte - Main telephone menu
rior antenna directs the electromagnetic fields outside and the
streng t h of t he fi elds inside t he vehicle decreases in comparison - Press t he( TEL]funct ion bu tto n => page 15. Th e main tele -
to operation without an exterior antenna. ph o ne menu => fig. 114 will be displ ayed .
- Make sure t hat a retro fi t exter ior antenna is inst alled correct ly.
• You can find current info r mati on about the cell phone package
- Press the Memory co ntrol button 0 to op en the
online at www.audiusa.com or at an Audi dea lership. •
subm enu s f or t his function .
 Cell phone package

The following submenu s are ava ilable in the telephone A Bluetooth ce ll phone is connected to the cel l phone prep v ia Blue-
fun c tion : tooth, and the ignition is switched on :::::,page 95.
The foll owing describe d te lephone functio ns depend on :
Control button
fun c tion Te le phone subm e nu s • whether the cel l phone used is compat ib le with the ce ll phone
=> pag e 96 , fig . 114 package, if the described telephone functions are supported, and
Dialed numbers • whether or not the cell phone service provider supports these
Call mailbox tele p hone funct ions .
Di rectory
G)
Memory
Phone bookal
Received cal ls
[i ] Tips
• The active audio source is muted during a telephone call. The
Missed calls
status bar d isp lays the mute symbo l G) => page 24, f ig . 22.
Store current number
• There may be technica l int erference w ith cell pho nes, which can
al If your vehic le is equipped w ith a CDMA cell phone, the phone book entries impa ir the performance of the device. Please read the User's Guide
from the internal phone book of the cell phone are disp layed. If your vehicle
is equipped with a GSM cell phone , the phone book entries from the SIM for your cel l phone for more informat ion in this regard.
card and internal phone book are disp layed. • Reception may be impaired in covered areas, such as, for
examp le, in a t u nnel o r an underg ro und garage.
The following submenus are available in the telephone
• There may be areas without network coverage from cell phone
se tup fun c ti o n :
p rov iders. Unfo rtunately, the telep hone cannot be used there.
Telephone setup submenus • In order to use the telephone, you must have a contract with a
cel l p hone provider .
Press the [SETUP I Telephone sett ings
Call options • You can select different telephone functions in the instrument
f unction butto n in
Ma ilbox number cluster display cluster via the mu lt i-function steering wheel*
the telephone function
Memory settings => page 112.
=>page 108.
• The telep hone funct ions descr ibed depend on the compatibil ity
If there is no connection between the cell phone and the MMI, the of the cell phone with the cel l phone package, and whether or not
reminder Your telephone might not be connected or insert ed your cell pho n e service provider supports these f unctions. •
properly is disp layed in the MM I Display after pressing the (TE L i
functi o n button. Place the switched on cel l phone in the cel l pho ne
cradle:::::, page 93 or set up a Bluetooth connection:::::, page 95.

Requirements for teleph o ne c alls

A cell phone prep is installed in your vehicle:::::, page 91.
A cel l phone is connected to the cell phone prep :::::,page 93, or

·-.,,- .. • •
C e ll ph o n e p ac kag e

Applies to vehicles: w it h cell phone package and GSM cell phone crad le Unblocking Key), the SIM card in the cel l phone can be unlocked.
Entering a PIN (Personal Identification You can enter the PUK through your cell phone.
Number )
If "PIN" is displayed in the status bar, the cell phone must [i ] Tip s
be activated by entering the PIN. • When entering a PIN, only asterisks (*) are shown in the disp lay
in t he p lace of numerals.
• You can make an emergency cal l without entering the PIN. You
will be connected to the 911 emergency number~ page 98.
• PIN is not shown in the display in every instance, it depends on
the cell p hone being used and the cell phone provider.
• Depending on the cell phone being used, it may be necessary to
enter the PIN on the cell phone. In this case, you are not shown a
request to enter the PIN in the MMI Display .
Fig. 115 Telephone: • When the ignition has been switched on, a warning message
Ente ring PIN ~ page 10, fig . 2 wil l appear when the speller is used fo r the first
time while driving. Please read the warning message careful ly and
Press the !TEL] function button. follow the instructions. •

Enter the PIN us in g the spelle r => f ig. 115.

App lies to veh icles: with cell phone package and GSM cell phone crad le
Confirm the entry in the speller with OK. Emergency 911
If PIN G) ~ fig. 115 is displayed in the status bar, the cel l phone
must be activated by entering the PIN.
You can enter the PIN over your cell phone. Read the Owner's
Manual of your cell phone to find out how to do this.
The PIN (Personal Identification Number) consists of 4 to 8 numera ls
and protects your SIM card from unauthorized use. You can obtain
your PIN from your cel l phone provider together with the SIM card .
The speller for entering the PIN is displayed automatica lly when you
are in a telephone menu and you are required to enter the PIN. This Fig. 116 Telepho ne :
SOS opt ion ..
happens, for example, when the cell phone is switched on.
If you have entered an incorrect PIN three 9 l times in succession,
your SIM card is automatically locked. Using t he PUK (Personal 91 The number of numerals needed to enter a PIN can vary with the SIM card
being used.
 Cell phone package I..
Dispatching emergency call over the MMI Main telephone menu
without a SIM card
App lies to veh icles: with cell phone package and cell phone crad le
- Pre ss t he !TEL] func tion button.
Calling
- Press the SOS control button => page 98, fig. 116.
Telephone numbers can be entered through the speller in
- Select Dial and the 911 emergency call is selected .
the MM/ Display.
Emergency call over the MMI with a SIM card
and a PIN entered
- Pre ss t he !TE L] func t ion bu tton .
- Enter the number for the emergency call, e.g. 911, using
the speller .
- Press the Dial control button, or
Fig. 117 Telephone:
- Select OK using the speller to begin dial in g the call. Entering the telephone
number

& WARNING
Since your telephone operates with radio signals, a completed
connection cannot be guaranteed under all circumstances. Do not
rely exclusively on your telephone if it is a communication of
extreme urgency (e.g. medical emergencies ).

[i ] Tips
• In an emergency call, follow the instructions of the emergency Fig. 118 Telephone:
Dialing the call
office personnel exactly. Do not end the ca ll until you are to ld to.
Otherwise, you could fail to pass on vital information .
• Emergency numbers are not the same in all countries. If you
Entering and Dialing Telephone Numbers
change your country of residence, find out the emergency numbers - Press the !TE L] fu nct ion bu t t on .
in use there ahead of time. •
- By rotating and pressing the control knob, enter the
des ired telephone number in the speller display or the
corresponding letters, including the city and the count ry
code, if required => fig. 117. ~
• ....__C_e_ll""'
p
'--h_o_n_e
___,
p
'--a_c_k_a...;
g:::;._
e ____________________________________________ _

- Press the Dial control button ==>page 99, fig . 118, or To make a call with the speech dia log system*, p lease read
=> page 780.
- Selec t OK us in g the speller to start dialing the call.

Enter Te le ph o ne Numb e rs u s ing a Le tt e r [i ] Tip s

S e qu e n ce
- Press the !TEL] function button.
- By rotating and pressing the control knob, ente r an area
code using the speller, e.g. 1 800 .
- In the number speller, select 0-9 G) ==>page 99, fig . 117.
The speller will be displayed ==>page 25, fi g. 26.
- By rot ating and pressing the contro l knob, ente r a
sequence of letters using the speller, e.g. FORAUDI .
- To initiate t he call to the "AU DI Specia list", select OK in
the speller, or
- press the control button with the Dial function .
Searching for and Dialing a Stored Telephone
Number
- Press the cont rol butto n with t he Memory function .
- Selec t Stored number s, Addre ss book, Phone book,
Mi ssed calls or Calls received. The numbers w ill be listed .
- Select t he desi red telep hone number using the control
knob. The number is transferred into the spe ll er.
- To initiate t he call, select OK in the speller, or
- press the contro l button w ith the Dial funct ion.
• DTMF tones are entered direct ly through the spe ll er or loaded
from the stored te lephone n umbers => page 103.
• The active audio source is muted during a telephone call. The
status bar displays the mute symbo l 0
=> page 14, fig . 7.
• Whether or not navigation voice messages are announced
during a telephone call depends on the navigat ion setting
=> page 757.
• You can cont inue to make calls on your cel l phone. Read the
Owner's Manual of yo ur cell phone to find out how to do th is.
• If you make calls on your cell phone, it is possible that the tele -
phone number will not appear on the MMI Disp lay.
• When the ignition has been switched on, a warning message
=>page 10, fig . 2 wi ll appear when the speller is used for the first
time while driving . Please read the warning message careful ly and
follow the instruc t ions.
• You can also make phone calls using the multi-function steering
whee l* => page 114. •

The number in the entry field of t he spel ler can be deleted by

pressing the (RETURN ] button.
 C e ll phone p a ckag e

Ap plies to vehi cles: w ith cell p ho ne packag e and cell p ho ne cr adl e

Accepting/declining a call [i ] Tips

• The active audio source is muted during a telephone call. The
MMI status bar displays the mu t e symbol G) => page 14, fig . 7.
• If you have placed your cell phone in the cel l phone crad le, and
the phone book entries have not all been read by the cell phone
package, no te lephone numbers or names are shown in the MMI
Disp lay.
• Whet her or not naviga t ion voice messages are announced
during a te lephone cal l depends on the navigation sett ing
Fig. 119 Telephone: => page 151.
Display showi ng an
• The display of a nam e or a numb er in th e Navigation Syste m
incomi ng call
Disp lay depe nds o n compatibility of the cell phone used with t he
cell phone package . Consequently, the possibility exists tha t names
Accepting a call or numbers will not be shown in the display of the Navigation
Selec t Answer by press in g the co ntro l knob, or System.

- Press the Answer contro l but t on. • You can also accept o r ignore calls via the multi -function
st eering whee l*=> page 115. •
Declining a c all
App lies to veh icles: w ith cell phone package and cell phone cr adle
Select Ignore by turning and pressing the control knob,
or Ending a call

Press the Ignor e control button.

The disp lay shows the name, the telephone number or Unk nown . It
depends on whether t he caller has been stored in the phone book,
and whethe r his number is available for viewing in the display
=> fig . 119.
If the cell phon e is attached to the adapter during an incoming or
outgoing te lephone call, the MMI Display might not show all the
information right away und er certain circums t anc es. The hands- Fig. 120 Telephone:
free fea t ure is not avai lable in this case. Ending a call

With an incoming call , the Dial and End call functions do not appear
in the lower corners of the screen for you to select with the control - Press t he End call contro l butto n.
buttons. Instead you see the Answ er and Igno re functions.
_.___ C_e
_ ll...::
p'---
h_o_n_e----'
p_a_ c_k_a...::
g:;..
e____________________________________________ _

Switching the microphone on

[i ] Tips - Press the Options control button during a telephone call.
You can also end calls via the multi -function steering wheel*
=>page 115. • - Select Mute off. The microphone is switched on again,
and you can continue your telephone call.
Ap pli es to vehicles: w ith cell phone packag e and cell pho n e cradle
When you have switched the microphone off, you are shown Muted
Mute on/off in the MMI Display.
During the muting (microphone off), the other party cannot hear
your conversations . However , you can continue to hear the other
party. •

App li es to vehi cles: w ith cell p ho ne package and GSM cell p hone cradle

Replacing a call
An active telephone call can be replaced by an incoming
Fig. 121 Telephone: call.
Mute on

Fig. 123 Telephone:

Fig. 122 Telephone :
Replacing a call
Call muted (micro-
phone offl
Accepting an incoming call
Switching the microphone off - Select Replace by pressing the control knob during a
Press the Options contro l button dur ing a telephone call . second incoming call, or
- Select Mute on . The microphone is sw itched off and the - Press the Replace control button. The incoming call is
other party can no longer hear you . accepted and the current call is ended. ..,
 C e ll phone p a ckag e

Declining an incoming call Memory control button

- Selec t Ignore by pressing the cont rol knob dur in g a
Ap p lies t o vehicles: w ith cell p ho ne pack ag e and cell p hon e cradle
seco nd incomi ng cal l, o r
General information
- Press the Ignore control button.

A second call during a telephone conversation can be shown in the

display and simultaneous ly an audible signal is heard. If the second
caller ends his call before you have accepted or declined it, no
audib le signal wi ll be heard. The MM I Display readout may be visibl e
f or several seconds more , depending on the cell phone being used.
If you use the Replace or Ignore functions in the MM I during this
delay period, the current telephone call may be terminated under
certain circumstances.
Fig. 124 Telephone:
M emory
[i ] Tips
In order to be alerted to an incoming call during an ongo ing te le-
phone call, you have to activate the "Call waiting" fu n ction in you r
cell phone . Read the Owner's Manual of your cell phone for
informa t ion. •

Fig. 125 Telephone:

Store curre nt numb er

Using the memory, you can disp lay the telephone numbers in the
directory , in the phone book and in the call lists and make calls . The
call list entries can be saved in the directory .
The following functions are availab le:
• Dialed numbers~ page 104
• Call mailbox ~ page 104
• Directory ~ page 105
• Phone book~ page 105
• ....__C_e_ll""'
p
'--h_o_n_e
___,
p
'--a_c_k_a...;
g:::;._
e____________________________________________ _

• Received cal ls :::::,page 106 - Select the desired te lephone number using t he control
• Missed cal ls :::::,page 107 knob .
• Store current number:::::, page 107 - Press the Dial control button in a t elephone menu .

[i ] Tips
• If certain prerequis ites are not met, functions can be shown
"greyed out". For example, if you have not stored a mailbox number
in the setup telephone:::::, page 110, the Call mailbox function is
shown "greyed out". Consequently, the function cannot be selected.
• The functions are also shown "greyed out" if the data from the
phone book or the call lists have not finis hed being loaded. As soon
as the data have been loaded, the funct ions can be selected .
• Depending on t he cell phone being used, it may happen that no
phone book entries and no entries for the "Dialed numbers",
"Received calls" and "Missed calls" functions are shown in the MMI
Display . •
Applies to vehi cles : w ith cell p hon e packag e and cell p hone cradle
The teleph o ne n umbers or the names of the last ten lOl numbers
dialed are stored .
Depending on the cell phone being used, the last number dia led is
put either at the head or at the end of the list .
The sort sequence of call lists can be altered with the Resort call
page 170function. For example, if the last number dia led is
lists :::::,
set to the last posi t ion in t he call list, it is set to t he first position
whe n the Resort call list s funct ion is activa t ed.
If the last number dia led is put at the end, the repeat dia ling func -
tion of the speech dia log system* cannot be used.
You can also call up the list of Dialed numb ers in the main telepho n e
menu by pressing the contro l knob with the Dial function if there is
no telephone number in the speller entry field. •

Dialed numbers App lies to vehic les: with cell phone package an d cell p ho ne crad le

Calling mailbox

- Press the M emory co ntrol button in a t elephone me nu.

Select Call mailbox . The mailbox number you stored is
shown in the display.
- Select the Dial control button . The call is dia led.

Before you can use the function, you have to store the mai lbox
Fig. 126 Teleph one:
Dialed numb ers number in the setup te lephone :::::,page 110. In the setup te lephone,
you can change or de lete the mailbox number . .,_
- Press the Memory control button in a te lep hone menu.
- Selec t Dialed numbers , you r last numbers dialed are ,m The numb er of last dialed numb ers st or ed can vary w it h t he cell phon e be-
listed. ing used and the cell phone provider.
 Cell phone package

When you are shown the mailbox number in the MMI Display, and
you press the cont rol knob, the speller menu w ith your ma ilbox
number is displayed. In this way, you can change the mailbox
numb er again, for example , t o ent er t he country cod e wh en calling
from outside the country.
[i] Tips
You must set up and activate this service in the cell phone network
in advance . You can obtain more i nformation from your cell phone
provider. •
- Press the control button with the Dial function.
If several telephone numbers are stored for one person, all of them
are presented in the selection .
If no t elephone numbers are stored in t he dir ectory, t he directory is
shown "greyed out" - it is not possible to make a selection.
[i] Tips
Administration of the directory data is handled through the [NAME]
button ~ page 82. •

Ap plies to vehicles: w ith cell p ho ne package an d cell p ho ne cradle

Ap p lies to veh icles: w ith cell phone packag e and cell ph one crad le
Directory Phone book

Fig. 127 Telephone:

Searching for an entry
Fig. 128 Telephone:
in the directory
Phone book

- Press the Memory control button in a telephone menu . Press the Memory control button in a telephone menu.
- Select Directory by rotating and pressing the control Select Phone book by rotating and pressing the control
knob. knob.
Select Find entry ~ fig . 127, the speller is displayed - Select Find entry ~ fig . 128, the speller is displayed-
enter the name you are looking for, or enter the name you are looking for, or
Select a name from the list ~ fig. 127. Select a name from the list .
- Select and confirm OK in the speller, or Select and confirm OK in the speller, or
• ....__C_ e_ll""'
p
'--h_o_n_e
___,
p
'--a_c_k_a...;
g:::;._
e ____________________________________________ _

- Press the Dial control button . entries, entries starting with diff erent init ial letters cou ld be missing
in the MM I. •
Loa ding th e phone book e ntries
As long as the cell phone supports this funct ion, the phone book Ap p li es to ve hi cles: w ith cell phone package an d cell p hone cradle
entries are automatica lly loaded into the cell phone package
memory after the ign it ion is switched on and the phone has been Received calls
placed in th e cell phone cradle . This loading process can last several The telephone numbers or the names of the last calls
minutes and depends on the number of entries in the pho n e book. received are stored.
PLEASE WAIT is disp layed in the ins t rumen t cluster display during
t he load ing process. - Press th e Memory co ntrol butt on in a telephone me nu.
The last four p hone books loaded int o the cell phone package are - Selec t Received call s ~ page 103, f ig . 124. The last ca lls
saved . After a f ifth cell phone is instal led in the cell phone package,
receive d are list ed .
the phone book from the cell phone which has not been the longest
in use is de leted. Up to 1000 phone book entries can be saved each - Select the te lepho ne number desired wi t h the contro l
time . knob.
Re-installing the cell phone - Press the Dial contro l button.
With t he same cell phone, the phone book entr ies are already saved
in the cel l phone package. You can use the phone book after a brief The telephone numbers or names of the last ten l l l calls received are
wa iting per iod . stored.

The syst em checks the phone book entries for changes and updates The te lephone number or the name of the last caller accepted is put
and loads t hem int o the memory aut o matically. Th is loading proce - at the head of the list .
dure can take several minutes . Depending on the cel l phone, the telephone number or name of the
last caller missed is put either at the head or at the end of the list. •
M o bile phone book entry categories
Phone book entries are shown in alphabetical order and are labe led
by category, e.g. SIM cards, ho me, wor k, cell phone and pho ne
symbo ls ::::;,page 105, fig. 128.

[i ] Tip s
• The way that phone book entries are displayed in MMI depends
on t he cel l pho ne being used .
• It can happen that th e cell phon e might not transmit phone book
ent ries in alphabe ti cal o rder . If the re are too many pho ne book
111
The numb er of miss ed cal ls stor ed can vary with t he cell phon e in use and
the cel l phone provider.
 C e ll phone p a ckag e

Ap plies to vehicles: w ith cell p ho ne packag e and cell p hone cr adl e App lies to ve hicles : w ith cell p ho ne pack ag e and cell ph on e cr adle

Missed calls Store number in the directory

Fig. 129 Telephone: Fig. 130 Telephone :

M issed calls Store in directory

- Press the Memory control button in a telephone menu. Enter a telephone number, or
- Select Mi ssed calls ~ fig. 129. The last calls received in Select a te lepho ne number from the Dialed numbers ,
your absence are listed . Received calls or Missed calls list .
- Selec t the des ired te lep hone num ber w it h t he contr o l Press the Memory co ntrol button .
knob.
Select Store current number .
- Press the Dial contro l butto n.
Select New entry ~ page 84, or
The telephone numbers or names of the last ten 12 ) calls missed are Select Find entry ~ page 83, or
stored .
Select an existi ng entry from t he list ~ page 85.
Depending on the cell phone, the te lephone number or name of t he
last caller m issed is put either at the head or at the end of t he list . • Select Store in directory . The entry is sto red in the d irec -
tory .

First, enter a name . As long as you have not ent ered a name, the
remaining data fields are shown "greyed out" => fig. 130. After you
have entered a name , you can enter your remaining data.

[i ] Tips
121 The numb er of mi sse d calls stor ed can vary w it h th e cell phon e in use and Administration of the address data is handled through the [ NAM E]
the cel l phone p rovide r. button => page 82. •
- ,..__
___
C e ll .,__
ph__o n e__,_
p__ -=,.__
ac kag e _____________________________________________ _

App lies to vehicles: with cell p hone package and cell ph one crad le
Setup Telephone
Telephone settings
Applies to vehicles: w ith cell ph one p ackage and cell phone cradle

Opening and closing Setup

In a te lep hone me nu , press the !SETUP] f un ction button

to o pen t he main Set up menu for t he teleph o ne f uncti o n.
Press the !SETUP] butto n again to close the mai n Setup
menu again.
Fig. 131 Setu p Tele-
T he foll o wing se tting s a re p oss ible in Setup Telephone: phone: Telephone
sett ings
• Telephone settings => page 108
• Call options=> page 109
- In a te lephone me nu, press the [SETUP]functi on button.
• Mailbox number => page 110
- Select Telephone setting s.
• Memory settings=> page 110
The time/date, sound and sett ings functions and the brightness of Select t he setting desired.
the display can be adjusted using the control buttons=> page 160.
The fol lowing telephone settings are avai lable :

[i ]Tips Bluetoo t h s ettings

We recommend that you enter these settings when the vehicle is
st ationary . Please note => page 10, "Notes on Traffic Safety". •
Bluetooth is a wireless connection between the cellular phone and
your vehic le's MMI => page 95.
All Bluetooth devices connected to the MMI system - up to four
devices - are disconnected with the Remov e Bluetooth devices func -
tion. If you want to use one or more of the deleted devices again,
you have to reconnect the cellular phones to the MMI system
=> page 95.
A Bluetooth PIN must be entered in order to connect a Bluetooth
device => page 95. The Bluetooth PIN is set to 1234 by the manufac -
turer. You can define your own Bluetooth PIN with the BT PIN func-
tion. ..,
_____________________________________________ C_e_I_I..a.
p_h
_ o_n_e--=-
p_a_c
_ k_a..;::
g:;...
e__ llll
Default setting s App lies to veh icles: with cell p hone packag e and cell phone cradle

Restore the default settings when no phone cal l is being made, no Call options
cel lu lar p hone is co nnected via Bluetooth, and the cel lular p ho ne is
not inserted in the cell phone crad le. When you restore the default
sett ings, all t he cell p hone's stored phone books => page 105, the
Bluetooth device list=> page 95, and the mailbox number wil l be
erased. In addition, any Bluetooth connec t ion that is currently active
w il l be int errupted, and the Bluetooth PIN wi ll be reset to 1234
=> page 95. The Auto . call answer and Auto . redial => page 109 tu nc-
tio ns w ill be set to off .

Sound focus
Fig. 132 Setup Tele-
If the sound focus is set to front , the voice output during a phone phone: Call option s
call using the hands -free system will only be played through the
speakers in the front of the vehic le. If the center setting is selected, In a t ele phone me nu , press t he [SETUP) f unction bu tton .
vo ice output is p layed through the speakers in the front and the
middle of t he vehicle . - Select Telephone settings .

Shut down delay Selec t the setting desired.

The shut down delay for your telephone system can be switched
The following phone call opt ions are avai lab le to you:
on/off using this function.
If a check mark ./ is disp layed beh ind th is func ti o n => pag e 108, Auto . redial
fig. 131, the shut down de lay is switched on. During this time, the If you switch on automatic redial, the corresponding telephone
t elephone rema ins acti ve, even aft er the MMI has been switched off. number is auto matica lly d ialed up t o f ive ti mes . You can cance l
When the MMI is switched on again before this time expires, it is not automatic redial with the end cal l function .
necessary to re-ente r a PIN.
Auto . call answer
If no check mark is displayed beh ind th is funct ion, the shut down
If you sw itch on automatic call answer, an incoming call is automat -
delay is switched off. After the MMI is switched off, the telephone
ica lly picked up . You have a br ief mom ent to rejec t the incom ing call
system also switc hes off after a br ief per iod. This allows tw in card
with the Ignore function before the call is automatica lly picked up
users to use a second cel l phone after leaving the vehicle. •
and answered. •

·-.,,- .. • •
• ....__C_e_ll""'
p
'--h_o_n_e
___,
p
'--a_c_k_a...;
g:::;._
e ____________________________________________ _

Applies to vehi cles : w ith cell p hon e packag e and cell p hone cradle If you have stored the mailbox number here, you can call your
Mailbox (answering machine) mailbox using the Memory control button => page 104. This allows
you to listen to messages left in your mailbox.
Storing the mailbox number You have to set up and activate this service in advance. You can
obtain more information from your cell phone provider.
- In a telephone menu, press the [SETUP) function button.
- Select Mailbox number.
[i] Tips
- Press the control knob to enter the mailbox number with When calling from outside the country, enter the appropriate
the speller. country code for the telephone number . •
- Select OK in the speller to store your mailbox number.
App lies to veh ic les: wi th cell pho ne package and cell phon e crad le
Changing the mailbox number Memory settings
- In a telephone menu, press the [ SETUP ) function button.
Select Mailbox number.
- Press the control knob to change the mailbox number
with the spe ller.
- Select OK in the speller to store the changed mailbox
number.
Fig. 133 Setup Tele-
Deleting the mailbox number phone: Memory
settings
- In a telephone menu, press the [SETUP) function button.
- Select Mailbox number. Resort call lists
Press the control knob . The speller is displayed. - In a telephone menu, press the [SETUP)function button.

Select DEL in the speller. - Select Memory settings.

Continue to press the control knob until the mailbox - Select Resort call lists on to alter the sort sequence of the
number has been deleted. telephone numbers in the call lists depending on call
time .
- Select OK in the speller to confirm the deletion.
Memory used 13 l
- In a telephone menu, press the [SETUPjfunction button. ~
-------------------''-----------"----=-- Cell phone package 111
- Select Memory settings.
- Sele ct Memory used .
- Selec t SIM , Telephone or all.

Re s ort c all list s

The telephone numbers are sorted in the call lists (dialed numbers,
received calls, missed cal ls) by call t ime . Depending on t he compat -
ibility of the cellular phone and the cell phone package, it is possib le
that the nu mbers with the most recent call times are sorted to the
end of the cal l lists in the cell phone package . If you switch on the
Resort call list s function, the phone numbers with the most recent
call times are sorted to the beginning of the cal l lists in the cell
phone package.

M e m o ry us e d 13 >
If you select the SIM function, your cell phone's SIM card entries are
loaded and stored into the cell phone package .
If you select the Telephone function, your cell p hone's phone book
entries are loaded and stored into the cell phone package.
If you select the all function, the phone book entries of your SIM
card and your cel l phone address book are stored into the cel l
phone package .

[i ] Tip s
Depending on the cel l phone, either the SIM card entries or the cell
phone address book entr ies might not be available . Further infor -
mation about the cell phone package is avai lable on line at
www .aud iusa.com or at an aut hor ized Audi dealership. •

131 GSM cel l phone

·-.,,- .. • •
Calling using the multi-function steering wheel

Calling using the multi-function steering wheel

Introduction rr--- -======= :----rr1~

~
Appl ies to vehicles: w it h mu lti -function stee ring wheel, cell phone packa g e and cell phone
cradle

Controls
In tandem with the MM/ system, many different phone
functions can be carried out using the multi -function
steering wheel.

Fig. 135 Instrument

cluster display : Tele-
phone menu

- Press the [MODE) button on the multi-function steering

wheel until the telephone menu~ fig. 135 is shown in
the instrument cluster display.
- Select the particular telephone submenu by rolling and
pressing the left thumbwheel.
Fig. 134 Multi -func-
tion steering wheel
Options Brief descr iption
Left operating unit

Dialed numbers List of the last tena>telephone numbers

dialed.
List of all stored entries from your MMI direc-
Directory
tory.
List of all phone book entries stored in the
Phone book
cell phone package.
Received calls List of the last tena> calls accepted.

Missed calls List of the last tena> missed calls .

 Callin g usin g th e mu lti-fun c t ion st ee rin g whe e l

App lies to v eh icles: w ith m ulti -funct ion steeri ng w hee l, cell p hon e package and cell p hone
al Depend ing on your cell phone and cell phone provider , the number of en- cradle
t ries stored can vary.
Telephone status messages
Enter the PIN for your SIM card as needed through the spe ller in Various telephone status messages can be shown in the
MM I =>page 98 or through your cell phone . instrument cluster display.
If you have not yet entered t he PIN for your SIM card, but it is
Th e following t e le phon e s tatu s m ess a g es ca n b e
requ ired, Please enter PIN int o MMI is disp layed in the instrument
di s pl ayed :
cluster display .
Please w ait ... The connection with the vehic le is being estab -
Requ irem e n ts for Tel e phone Ca lls
lished .
A cell phone prep is installed in your vehicle=> page 91.
Please insert The SIM card is not in the cell phone .
A cel l phone is connected to the cell phone prep => page 93, or the SIM card .
A Bluetoot h cell phone is connected to the cell phone prep via Blue- Reading The SIM card memory is being read .
too t h, and the ignition is switch ed on =>pag e 95. SIM card ...
The fol lowing descr ibed te lephone functions depend on : Please The PIN n umbe r has not been entered yet.
• whether the cel l phone used is compatible with the cell phone ente r PIN
package, if the d escrib ed telephone functions are supported , and into MMl _al
• whether or not the cel l phone service provider supports these No connectio n There is no connection with the telephone net -
te lephone functions. work.
Con t ro ls Call An ext erna l call is being rece ived . If t he phone
• Left menu thumbwheel G) => page 112, fig . 134 number of the person calling is avai lable, this
will also be disp layed.
• IMODE ] but t on 0 => page 112, fig . 134
Busy The selected number is busy.

[i ] Tip s Telephon e is
switched off.
The telephone is switched off .

• The basic telephone functions are availab le on the multi-func -

tion steering whee l if your telephone equipment was installed at the Dialing The connec t ion is established .
fact ory. No The SIM card memory does not contain any
• The te lephone functions d isplayed in the instrument cluster ent ries entr ies.
depend on whether your cel l phone is compatible with the cell available .
phone pack age* , and whether your cell phone provider supports
Telephone not The telephone is not connected with the vehi -
these functions . • connected or cle .
inserted. •
·-.,,- .. • •
Calling using th e multi-fun c tion st e ering wh ee l

In the instrumen t clus t er display, you can on ly access stored tele-

al GSM cell phone
phone number entries , You can find additiona l information about
the d irectory, the phone book and the cal l lists in the Mem ory
=> pag e 703function .
Calling
The Directory menu lists your stored entries in the MM I system
Appli es to veh icles: with m ulti-f u nctio n steering wh eel, cell phone packa g e and cell p hone
(NAME function => page 82) .
cradle
A telephon e number which has not yet been stored, is ent ered
Calling through the MM I Display (speller) => page 99.
Calls can als o be made from the instrument cluster Let ters are shown in the instrument cluster display . The letters have
display. the fo llowing meani ngs:
• "I P" represents a private t elephone number,
• "/W" represents a business telephone number (Work),
• "/ M" represents a mobile phone number .

[i ] Tips
• With an incoming/outgo ing cal l, audio source muting is act i-
vated automatically .
• Wh eth er or not navigation voic e messages are announced
during a teleph o ne call depends on the navigation setting
=> pag e 751. •
Fig. 136 Instru ment
cluster display: Direc-
t ory

- Press the [ MODE ] butto n @ => page 112, fi g. 134 on the

mu lti -funct ion steering wheel until the telephone menu
is dis pl ayed => page 112, f ig. 135.
- Sele ct t he Directory , t he Phone book or one of t he call
lists Dialed numbers , Received calls or Missed calls by
rolling and press ing the left th umbw heel.
- Sele ct t he des ired te lep hone number => fig. 136 by
ro lling and pressin g the left t hu mbw heel. The call is
dialed .
 Calling using the mu lti-fun c t ion st ee ring wh ee l

App lies to vehicles: w ith m u lti-fu nct io n steer ing w hee l, cell p ho ne packag e and cell p ho ne
cradle [i ] Tips
Accepting/declining calls • With an incoming/outgoing call, audio source muting is acti -
Telephone calls can be accepted/declined with the multi- vated automatically .
function steering wheel. • Whether or not navigation voice messages are announced
during a t elephone cal l depends on the navigation setting
~ page 151. •

App lies to veh icles: w ith m ulti-funct ion st eering w hee l, cell phon e p ackag e and cell p hone
crad le

End ing a call

AT&li Wi~
~~-

Fig. 137 Inst rume nt

l cluste r d isplay:
Accept/ decline calls

Accepting a c all
- Press the left thumbwheel on the multi -function steering
wheel while the phone is ringing to accept the call. Fig. 138 Inst ru me nt
cluster display: End
D e clining a c a ll call

Roll the left thumbwheel to Ignore and press . The call is

By roll i ng and pressing the left thumbwhee l, select End
decline d .
call =>fig . 138. The call is ended. •
The display shows the name, the telephone number or Unknown . It
depends on whether t he caller has been stored in the phone book,
and whether his number is avai lable for viewing in the display
~ page 101, fig . 119.
Calling using the multi-function steering wheel

Applies to vehicles: w it h mu lt i-funct ion steer ing wheel, cell phone packag e and cell phone
crad le

Replacing a call
An ongoing telephone call can be replaced by an
incoming call.

Fig. 139 Instrument

cluster display:
Replacing a call

Accepting an incoming call:

- Select Replace by rolling and pressing the left thumb-
wheel. The current telephone conversation is replaced by
the incoming call.

Declining an incoming call:

- Select Ignore by rolling and pressing the left thumb-
wheel. The incoming call is declined .

[i ] Tips
In order to be alerted to an incoming call during an ongoing tele-
phone call, you have to activate the "Call waiting" function in your
cell phone. Read the Owner's Manual of your cell phone for
information . •
 Calling using the multi-function steering wheel

General operation RADIO, CD/AUX NAME, TEL NAV, INFO CAR.SETUP

• .___ N_a
_ v_ig=-a_t_io_n
_ (_N_A
_ V_>_____________________________________________ _

Navigation (NAV)
Applies to vehicles: with Navigat ion system

General safety precautions [i ] Tips

• The vo lume of the navigation instruct ions can be adj usted wh il e
The driver is com pletely responsib le for traffic safety even th e in st r uct io n is bein g spo ken, by usi ng th e ON/O FF kn o b o n th e
when dr iving w ith the Naviga ti on system active . M MI button panel or by rotating the right thumbwhee l on the multi -
f un cti o n stee ri ng w heel * ~ pag e 121.
This system offers information that wi ll help y ou to reach your desti -
• The Navigat ion system is designed to provide you with
natio n easil y and safe ly.
sugges te d rou te s in locat i ng ad dre sses, destinations an d ot her
points of interest.
& WARNING • Cha ng es in stree t names, construc ti o n zo nes, t raffi c fl ow, poi nts
of interest or other road system change s are beyond the contro l of
• Always obey traffic laws , signs and signals , they take prece -
Aud i of Am erica, Inc .
dence over Navigation system recommendations .
• Complete, detailed mapping of lanes, roads , streets, tol l road s,
• Always concentrate on driving and pay attention to the road ,
hig hways, et c., is not po ssibl e, the ref or e yo u m ay enco un t er
listen to the voice messages and never let yourself be distracted
discrepancies between the mapp i ng and your actual location . •
by the map display on the screen ~ page 10.
• Always remember that data on the navigation DVD can differ
from the actual situation because of insufficient data or because
the road or traffic routing has changed since the area was
Introduction
mapped. Do a " reality check" and ignore the Navigation system
App lies to vehicles: with Navigation system
recommendation if necessary .
General
• Always remember that even if one -way streets , pedestrian
zones , etc . are stored on the navigation DVD, traffic routing is
subject to constant change. Traffic signals , turning lanes or prohi -
bitions , stop and yield signs , no parking and similar zones as well
as narrow lanes are not covered by the Navigation system .
• Always adjust your speed to road, traffic and weather condi-
tions and visibility. Never let information about the road ahead
cause you to drive too fast for conditions , for example in fog .
• The volume setting should be selected to ensure that outside
Fig. 140 MMI Display:
signals , such as police and fire truck sirens, are always audible -
Example of navigation
danger of accident! map 1)1,,
 Navigation (NAV) -
-----------------=--
The Navigation system can help you to reach your destination App lies to veh icles: with Navigation system

without spending a lot of time studying maps. Adjusting the volume of the Navigation voice
During the route guidance you will receive information on vehicle messages
position, turn information (direct ion and distance before turn) and
on the arrival time for your destination through various screen
displays (MMI Display=> page 120, fig. 140 and the instrument
cluster display => page 123, fig. 143). In addition you will receive
acoustic navigation information in the form of a spoken announce-
ment => page 123.
There are two possibilities for guide destination:
• Route without stopover (Single destination model
• Route with stopover (Route plan)

Route without stopover (Single destination mode)

Fig. 141 MMITerminal :
In single destination mode you can drive directly to a destination ON/OFF knob ·
=> page 129. adjusting volume

Route with stopover (Route plan)

In this mode, you can choose up to three stopovers and one final
destination => page 131.
For example, while on your way to your final destination, you could
have three stopovers, such as: the nearest gasoline station, then a
@
restaurant and after that a point of interest to visit.

& WARNING
Follow the traffic laws for the area in which you are driving . If
driving instructions run contrary to traffic laws, the traffic laws Fig. 142 Multi-func-
always take precedence. tion steering wheel :
Right thumbwheel

[i] Tips During the announcement of a navigation voice message,

However, the system will not provide you with any information you can adjust the volume of the navigation voice messages
about the meaning of traffic signs and signals! • on the MMI Terminal or on the multifunction steering wheel. •

'NAV,'INFO
.'
11111 N av ig ati o n (NAV )
,_____-=-----------------
Adju stin g th e vo lum e on th e MMI Te rminal DVD. In this way, gu idance to your destination can be calcu lated
precise ly.
- Tur n the ON/OFF rotary knob=> page 121, fig . 141 during
t he announcement of a voice message . To calculate guidance to your destination, the navigation DVD has to
be inserted into the navigation drive=> page 32.
Adjusting th e v o lum e on th e multi-fun c ti o n Three different languages (English, French, Spanish) are available
st ee ring wh ee l on the nav igat ion DVD for audible navigation vo ice messages. You
- Roll the right thumbw heel @ =>page 121, fig. 142 up :!:.d can change the language for the audible navigation voice messages
using t he M enu langu age funct ion in set up => page 161.
to increase the volume, or
- Roll the right thumbwheel @ down :.::i to reduce the
volume during a voice message .
[i ] Tips
• Snow and objects on the GPS ant enna can also affect satel lite
The basic vo lume for navigation voice messages can be adjusted reception, thus interfering with automatic vehic le position determi -
with the Sound control button => page 79. nat ion . If several sate llites are turned off or disabled, this may result
in interference with GPS reception and make it more difficult to
det ermine vehicle locat ion.
[i ] Tips • Your map data DVD inc ludes the continenta l United States
The last navigation vo ice message can be repeated by press ing the (inc luding Alaska), Hawaii and parts of Canada on a single med ia
Nav-lnfo contro l button, or by pressing the right menu thumbwhee l allowing for seamless routing across coverage areas.
on the multi -function steering wheel. The volume can also be
• Street and city names can be changed . For this reason, there may
adjusted via the MM I terminal or the mu lti-function steering whee l
be exceptions where the names stored on the DVD do not match the
while the vo ice message is being repeated . •
names t hat have been changed .
• Navigation DVDs/updates are availab le at www.naviga -
Applies to vehic le s: w it h Navigat ion syst em tion .com/audi or by calling (866) 345-AUD I. •
How does the Navigation system work?
The Navigation system works with the help of sa tellites
(GPS).
To determine current vehicle position, information about distance
and satellite signa ls are analyzed . The signals are transmitted by
GPS satellites . The acronym GPS stands for "Global Positioning
System" .
The recorded information is transferred to the Navigat ion system
and then compared with the map material stored on the navigation
____________________________________________ .:..
N:.:a=..v.:..:.::
ig~a=-t::i.=
o:.:.
n.:....:.:
<N~ A.:.. __.11
V::..:...
>

App lies to veh icl es: w it h Navigati o n sys tem Ap plies to veh icles: wi th Navi gat ion syste m

Navigation route guidance Navigation voice guidance

Route calcu lation is announced via a corresponding voice message.

At the same time , the route criter ia appear in the MMI Display
(~ page 143, "Route criteria") and a directiona l arrow appears in the
in stru ment clu ster display .
When route calcu lation is complete, guidance is given by spoken
dr iving instruc t ions and sy mbol s. Driving recommenda t ions are
always made with enough t ime to ma ke a turn .
You can use the following options t o repeat the last navigation voice
me ssage :

Fig. 143 Navigation : • Press the right thumbwheel on the multi -function steering
As seen in the instru - w heel* ~ page 22,
ment cluster display
• Press the Nav-lnfo control button in th e navigation menu
~ p ag e 14 7, if you are not in the Nav-lnfo sub menu .
Guidance for your route navigation is provided both visua lly and
acoustically . You can choose wh ich language you want for t he voice messages
~ p age 161.
• with voice messages
•
•
visua l presentatio n in the MMI Display ~ page 120, fig. 140
visual presentation in the instr u ment c luster display ~ fig. 143
& WARNING
If driving instructions run contrary to traffic laws , the traffic law s
always take precedence .
[i ] Tips
• If the recommended route is not followed, the system will calcu-
late a new route from the curren t location. [i ] Tips
• If you want to repeat the last navigation announcement , press • The vo lume of the navigation ins t ructions can be adj usted while
t he r ight thum bwhee l on the mult i-f unctio n st eering wh eel* the i nstr ucti on is being spo ken, by usin g t he ON/OFF knob on t he
~ page 19. MMI button panel or by rotating the right thumbwheel on the multi -
function steering wheel * ~ page 121.
• It is also possible to start the navigation in demo mode
~ page 153for simulation purposes . • • If t he vehicle is in a location which cannot be read by the Naviga-
tion system (par king lot, garage , par king str ucture), a vo ice
message will inform you. •

'NAV,"INFO
..
• .___N_a
_ v_ig
=-a_t_io_n
_ (_N_A
_ V_>_____________________________________________ _

Applies to vehicles: w it h Navigat ion system Applies to vehicles: with Navigat ion system

Navigation display in the MMI Visual presentation in the instrument cluster

display
The detailed route will be displayed on a map in the MM/.

Fig . 144 Navigation :

Map display in the MMI
Fig . 145 Instrument
cluster display: Naviga-
In the navigation menu, select Map => fig. 144. The route tion display of a lane
change
is visible on a map :::>page 144.

If you have entered your desired route into the MMI and have n ---- ;::::=======:::- ----u: &i
started the navigation, the map will provide detailed information
about your route=> page 144. •
I

Fig . 146 Instrument

cluster display: Naviga-
tion display of a turn

As soon as you have entered a route into the MMI and have begun
navigating, the navigation will also be displayed in the instrument
cluster display. .,

-----------------=--
Display Short descripti on
G) Total distance to next destination/stopover
© Esti mated time of arrival
Expressways, highways and street names are dis-
played depending on position and zoom level.
© An arrow in front of the display identifies the
name of the street where you should turn off.
© Remaining distance before change of direction .
© Arrow displayed for the direction change.
The bar graph decreases in length until you reach
© the turn . The bar graph is disp layed when the
change of direct ion arrow is shown .
When the turn -off is immediately ahead, the arrow points in the
direction in which you should turn . In addition , the name of the
street is shown under the arrow. A bar graph ~ page 124, fig. 146 on
the right in the display takes you precisely to the turn -off point .
If it is necessary to make a lan e change before the turn off , you are
warned in plenty of time about this lane change before the turn-off
arrow by a second arrow ~ page 124, fig. 145.
The navigation display in the instrument cluster is also shown if you
open other functions in the MMI during navigation.
& WARNING
The route calculated by the Navigation system is only a recom-
mendation for reaching your destination. Be aware of traffic lights,
stopping restrictions, one-way streets, lane-changing restrictions,
etc.
Navigation (NAV) -
[i] Tips
• If an asterisk"*" is shown before the street name in the instru -
ment cluster display , this is a reminder to you that these are streets
for which not all the features are mapped and traffic regula tions
recorded . For example, contrary to the route guidance recommen-
dations, it may be a one -way street, pedestrian zone, and so on.
Always follow local traffic directions and obey all traffic laws.
• If the street does not have a name, or if you are outside a digi -
talized region, "offroad" will appear in the instrument cluster
display instead of the street name.
• If the active audio source (e.g. radio) or telephone* function is
shown in the instrument cluster display, press the [ MODE] button
until the navigation display appears.
• During active navigation, the trip computer can be turned on by
quickly pressing the trip computer reset button (refer to the vehicle
Owner's Manual). If you press the button again, you will return to the
previous status. •
App lie s to vehicles: with Navigati on system
Street categories
Fig. 147 Navigation :
Display of street cate-
gories
There are two different street categories:
• .___ N_a
_ v_ig=-a_t _io_n
_ (_N_A
_ V_>_____________________________________________ _

• Streets shown in color G) are, for example, main highways with App lies to veh icles : w it h Navigati on syste m
all the data about their featur es and traffic regulations mapped in Selecting navigation function
the Navigation system .
The navigation functions in the MM/ con be selected with
• Small side streets (for example , in resid ential areas) are shown in
white @ on the map. Streets for which not all features have been the INAV] function button.
mapped and traffic regulations registered are also shown in white .
For example, contrary to the route guidance recommendations, it
may be a one-way st reet , pedestrian zone and so on.
The Navigation system prefers the streets depicted in color G) to
calculate route guidance. It may happen that the result involves a
detour for route guidance.
Under Route options => page 143 select the setting short if the Navi-
gation system is supposed to consider all street cat egories when
calculating route guidance. If the MMI does not calculate an alter - Fig. 148 MMI Display:
Main navigation menu
native rou t e, the route using the white streets t akes more t ime than
the estimated loss of time taking the detour.
Press the [NAV] function button ~ page 15. The main
navigation menu ~ fig. 148 or the previous active navi-
& WARNING gation function menu appears in the MMI Display.
• If driving instructions run contrary to traffic laws, the traffic
- Press one of the control buttons ~ page 16 to move to
laws always take precedence.
the appropriate submenus G) to © ~ fig . 148. ..,
• Always read and heed=> page 120, "Genera l safety
precautions". •
______________________________________________ N
_ a_v_i.;::
g;...
a_t_i_
o_n_ CN
_ A_V
_ >__ !II
The following submenus are available in navigation The following submenus are available in navigation
function: setup function:

Control button Navigation setup submenus

functions
Navigation submenus
=> page 126, Map scheme
fig. 148
Orientation
Previous destinations Intersection zoom
Top categories Map view
Load from directory Press the [SETUP ! Map content
Store in directory function button in
CD the NAV function
Voice guidance
Memory Edit directory Altitude display
Load route => page 147
Delete previous destinations
Store route Enter NAV start location
Delete route Demo mode
Version information
Route with stopover/
Route without stopover
0 Route list [i] Tips
Route Route criteria
page 141, fig . 166 is displayed
• If the menu for Route plan :::::,
Avoid route from here
when you call up the main navigation function, then you are in route
© Zoom guidance with stopovers . If you wish to switch to the main menu,
Map Map side menu select and confirm Route without stopovers in the menu for the
Route function:::::, page 141.
Destination/stopover data
Estimated time of arrival • If you want to repeat the last navigation announcement, press
Distance the right thumbwheel on the multi -function steering wheel *
Location data (for example : street, city) => page 22.
Telephone number for special destinations • You can read detailed information about the return button and
© (if available) the function and control buttons starting at => page 12. •
Nav-lnfo
Geographic destination data (latitude, longi-
tude)
Geographic location of your vehicle (latitude,
longitude, altitude)
Received satellites

·-.,,- .. NAV, INFO • •

• ....__ N
_ a_v_i.;;::;
g_a_t_io
_ n_ (N_ A_V_ ) ----------------------------------------------

Main navigation menu • Previous dest inations=> page 137

Applies to vehic les: w ith Navigat ion system
Entering a navigation
Destinations can be entered in various ways.
• Top categories => page 137
• Load from directory=> page 138
destination • Load route => page 140
• Map => page 145
Entered dest inations can be saved => page 138 and => page 140.
Route criteria=> page 143 can be changed at anytime during guid-
ance to your destination and the route will be recalculated
=> page 136.
If you do not comp lete route guidance you started, this route guid -
ance w ill be continued t he next time t he veh icle is star t ed. This also
applies to destinations entered which cannot be reached because of
Fig. 149 Navigat ion: local condit ions (e.g. lake or tourist attraction). If you want to end
Desti nation inp ut this route guidance, select Cancel route guidance=> page 136.
menu (main menu)

First determine whether you would like to navigate to a fina l desti-

nation with or without stopovers=> page 141. After you have
& WARNING
Follow th e tr affi c laws for th e area in w hich you are driving. If
decided on the type of guidance (with/without stopovers), you can
driving instr uction s run contrary to t raffic law s, the traffi c law s
enter a dest inat ion over different routes. Enter ing destinat ion data alwa ys t ake precedence.
in the entry menu => fig. 149 is hand led in the same way in single
dest ination and route p lanning mode.
After selecting the country=> page 129, you can enter destinations [i ] Tip s
in different ways. There are two ma in categories. In the navigation A function may not be selected ("greyed out") if it is not available
menu you can start by entering the street or city . according to the rest rictions you have set, or if not permitted by
local circumstances. •
The fol lowing options are available for entering a destination:
• Sing le destination (route without stopover)=> page 129
• Route plan (route with stopover) => page 131
• Street in a new city=> page 132
• St reet in a previous ly selected city => page 133
• City/street with specia l characters => page 133
• Specia l destinations=> page 134
______________________________________________ N
_ a_v_i.;::
g;...
a_t_io
_ n_ (N fflll
_ A_V_ >_ .....

Appl ies to veh icl es: w it h Navigat ion system Ap plies to vehi cles: with Navigation system

Country selection Entering single destination (route without

stopover )
The desired country must be selected first in the main
navigation menu.

Fig. 152 Navigation :

Entering a destination
using the speller
Fig. 150 Navigation :
Main menu

Fig. 153 Navigation :

Select downtown
Fig. 151 Navigation :
Country select ion
- Press the [ NAV] function button.
- Press the {NAV) function button. Press the control button with the Route function and
- Select Country in a destination input menu =>fig. 150. confirm the Route without stopover function to switch to
single destination mode (main navigation menu)
- Select either CANADA, USA or HAWAII => fig. 151. =>page 141. The destination input menu => fig. 150
When selecting a country, destination data (street, city and catego- appears.
ries) that was previously stored in the main navigation menu is - Select a Country from the list by rotating and pressing
deleted . • the control knob. .,

'NAV,' INFO
..
• ....__N
_ a_v_i.;;::;
g_a_t_io
_ n_(N_A_V_) ----------------------------------------------
- Select City/ ZIP and enter the city or the zip code using
the speller, or
- In the spe ll er display, select LIST and select the city from
the list.
- Select Select dow nto w n => page 129, fig . 153 to navigate
to the center of the selected locality .
- Select Input stre et name , Spe cial destin ation in city or
Dest ination input on map to set more detai led destina -
tio n criter ia.
- Select St art route guid ance. Before the system changes
to map display mode, t he route criteria=> page 143 used
wi ll be shown .
If you have entered the destination data with city/zip code and
street and have exited the dest ination input menu => page 128,
fig. 149, you can now choose to add more detai led information
about the destination . Press the INAV] function button to return t o
the destination input menu. Select row 0
=> page 128, fig. 149 by
turning and pressing the contro l knob. Choose the street number or
intersection and enter your destination data.
Ci t ies
During entry, the system suggests cities you have entered previ -
ously. The suggested city appears in the entry fie ld of the speller
=> page 129, fi g . 152. Other cities that match t he entry are listed
underneath. The number of cities found is shown in the lower right -
hand corner 0 => page 129, fig. 152.
If you have entered a part of a city in the speller disp lay and you
already recognize the desired city in the spe ller display list, you can
shift directly to the city list by keeping pressure on the control knob.
Switch from the letter spe ller to the number speller to enter a city
with specia l characters (e.g. hyphen, apostrophe or period) or a zip
code for a city => page 133.
Selection "Sele c t downtown "
The Navigation system calculates route guidance to the center of
the city entered .
Se lec tion " Input str ee t n a m e"
By entering the stree t i n a city, you can spec ify the destination more
precise ly.
Afte r selecting the street, you can set more detailed destination
criteria by entering an Inter secti on or a Street numb er.
If you wou ld like to find a street independent ly of the city, select
Stre et after selecting the country in the destination input menu
=> page 132.
Se lec t ion "S pec ia l de st in a tion in ci t y"
By selecting a specia l destination in the specified city, tourist attrac -
tions or public fac il ities (e.g. hospita l, movie theater, recreation
areas) can be selected directly as a destination.
If you would like to find a par t icu lar specia l destination indepen -
dently of the city, select Special destin ation => page 134 after
selecting the country in t he dest ination inpu t menu.
Se le ct io n " D es tin a ti o n input o n map "
You can find destinations f or a spec ified city from the map display.
If the map is being displayed to select a destination, the crosshairs
are in the center of t he city in quest ion. By mov ing the crossha ir s
horizonta lly and vertica lly, you can set a new dest inat ion
=> page 145.
[i ] Tip s
• Destinations entered can be saved in the directory => page 138
so that they can be selected again as dest inations using the Load
from directory function => page 138.
• When the ignition has been switched on, a warning message
=> page 10, fig. 2 wi ll appear when the speller is used for the first ..,_
----------------=----- Navigation (NA V) Ill
time while driving. Please read the warning message careful ly and - Select Select downtown to navigate to the center of the
follow the instructions. selected locality, or
• Road options can be changed at anyt ime during guidance to
your destination and the route will be recalculated ~ page 136. •
- Select Input street name , Special destination in city or
Destination input on map to set more detailed destina-
t ion criteria.
App lies to vehicles: wit h Navigati o n system

Entering route plan (route with stopover) - Enter additional stopovers by using Stop 1, Stop 2 or
Stop 3.
Up to three stopovers and a final destination can be set in
the route plan. - Select Start route guidance to begin route guidance.
Before the system changes to map display mode, the
route criteria => page 143 used will be shown.

Cities
During entry, the system suggests cities you have entered previ -
ously. The suggested city appears in the entry field of the spe ller
~ page 129, fig . 152. Other cities that match the entry are listed
underneath. The number of cities found is shown in th e low er right -
hand corner © ~ page 129, fig. 152.
Fig. 154 Navigation : If you have entered a part of a city in the speller display and you
Route plan
already recognize the desired city in the spe lle r display list, you can
shift directly to the city list by keeping pressure on the control knob .
- Press the INAVI function button.
Switch from the letter spe ller to the number speller to enter a city
- Press the control button with the Route function and with special characters (e.g . hyphen, apostrophe or period) or a zip
confirm the Route with stopover function=> page 141 to code for a city ~ page 133.
switch to route plan => fig. 154.
Selection "Select downtown"
- Select Destin. to enter the final destination. The Navigation system calculates route guidance to the center of
the city entered .
- Select a Country from the list by rotating and pressing
the control knob. Selection "Input street name"

- Select City/ZIP and enter the city => page 129, fig. 152 or
the zip code using the speller, or
- In the speller display, select LIST and select the city from
the list.
By entering the street in a city , you can specify the destination more
precisely .
After selecting the street, you can set more detailed destination
criteria by enter ing an Intersection or a Street number.

·-.,,- .. NAV, INFO • •

 N av ig ati o n (NAV )
-
,_____-=-----------------
If you wou ld like to find a street independent ly of the city, select Ap plies to vehicle s: w ith Navigat ion syste m

Stre et after select ing the country in the destination input menu Destination input street in a new city
=>page 132.
The destination starts with the street and then with the
Se lec ti o n "Spec ia l des ti na ti o n in c it y" selection of a new city.
By selecting a specia l dest ination in the specified city, tourist attrac-
tions or public faci lities (e.g . hospita l, movie theater, recreat ion
areas) can be selected direct ly as a destination.
If you wou ld like to find a particular special dest i nation indepen-
dent ly of the city, select Special destination => page 134 after
selecting the country in the dest ination input menu .

S elect ion "D e sti nati o n input o n map "

You can find destinations for a specified city from the map disp lay.
Fig. 155 Navigat ion:
If the map is being displayed to select a destination, the cross hairs St reet in new city
are in the center of the city in question . By moving the crosshairs
horizontally and vert ically, you can set a new destination - Press the [ NAV] function button.
=>page 145.
- Select Street in a menu for entering a des t inat ion (single
destination or route plan).
[i ] Tip s
• Route plans entered can be saved => page 140 so that they can - Select In new city ~ fi g. 155.
be selected again as destinations using th e Load route f unction - Enter a street name using t he "letter entry" or "numeric
=>page 140. entry " ~ page 25, or
• Road options can be changed at anytime during guidance to
your destination and the route w ill be recalcu lated => page 136. - Select a street from the list .
• When the ignition has been switched on, a warning message - Select City to select a city using the speller or to select
=> page 10, fig. 2 wi ll appear when the spe ll er is used for the first from the list, or
time while driving. Please read the warning message carefu lly and
follow the instruct ions. • - Sele ct Inter section t o select a possible intersec t io n t o
lim it ci ty selec t ion , or
- Select Street number to ente r a street number using t he
spelle r, thus limiting t he city selection .
- Select a city from the list provided .
-----------------=-- N av iga tion (NA V ) Ill
- Select Start rout e guid ance==>page 128, fig . 149. - Select a street from the li st.

If you want to enter the zip code (postal code) of a city, change the - Selec t End entry or
speller from letters to numbers=> page 133.
- Select Inte rsection to enter a possible intersection, or
- Select St reet number to select a street number us ing the
[i ]Tips speller .
A function may not be selected ("greyed out") if it is not available
according to the restrictions you have set, or if not permitted by - Select Start rout e guidan ce => page 128, fig. 149.
local circumstances. •

[i ] Tips
App lies to vehicl es: wit h Navigat ion system A function may not be selected ("greyed out"} if it is not available
Destination input street in a previously according to the restrictions you have set, or if not permitted by
selected city local circumstances . •

If a city is already in the main navigation menu, this desti-

Applies to ve hi cles: wi th Navigation system
nation input is possible.
Entering city / street with special c haracters
Memory Route

Street

.1 • In selected city

\
Nav-lnfo 1 2 :QQAM Map
Fig. 156 Navigation :
St reet in previously
selected cit y
Fig. 157 Navigat ion:
Switch fr om lette r
speller t o numb er
speller
- Press the (NAV) function button.
- Selec t Street in a menu for entering a desti nation (single - Press the INAV) function button .
destination or ro ute plan). - In a destination input menu ==>page 126, fig . 148, select
another Country fr o m the list by rotating and pressing
- Select In selected city.
t he control knob . .,_
- Enter a street name using the "letter entry" or "numeric
entry" ==>page 25, or

'NAV,' INFO
..
IIIII....__ N
_ a_v_i.;;::;
g_a_t_io_ n_(N_A_V_) ----------------------------------------------

- Select City / ZIP or Street in a menu for entering a destina-
tion (sing le destination or route plan).
- Enter the letters for the city/street in the letter speller
display as far as the specia l character (e.g. hyphen).
- In the speller display, select 0-9 => page 133, fig . 157 to
switch f rom letter to number input.
- Enter the specia l character (e.g. hyphen) for the
city/street.
- In the speller display, switch from number to letter input
as necessary to enter additional letters.
- Confirm the city/street wit h OK, or
- Press t he co ntrol knob and ho ld it dow n until the
ci ty/street list appears, or
During entry, the system suggests cities you have entered prev i-
ously. The suggested city appears in the entry fie ld of the speller
=> page 129, fig. 152. Ot her cities that match the entry are lis t ed
underneath. The number of cities found is shown in the lower right-
hand corner @ => page 129, fig . 152
[i ] Tips
• A funct ion may not be selec t ed ("greyed out") if it is not available
according to the restrictions you have set, or if not permitted by
local circumstances .
• When the ignition has been switched on, a warning message
=> page 10, fig . 2 wi ll appear when the speller is used for the first
time while driving . Please read the warning message careful ly and
f ollow the instructions. •
App li es t o vehicles: with Navi gati on system

- In the speller display, select LIST and select the Special destinations
city/street f rom the lis t. Speci al destinations can also be entered as navigation
- Enter add itional data for you r route as needed . destina tion.
- In single destination mode or in route plan, select St art
route guidance . The route is calculated and the map
display is shown automatically.

Using the number spel ler, you can input the special characters (e.g.
hyphen, apostrop he or per iod).
For example, if you wou ld like to enter the street "MA IN-STREET",
firs t enter the letters "MA IN" using the letter spel ler. Then swi t ch to
the number spe ller=> page 133, fig . 157 to enter the hyphen. The Fig. 158 Navigat ion:
Special destination ~
letters "STREET" are entered after switching back to t he letter
speller .
As an alternative to entering the city, the destination can be entered
usi ng the zip code. After selecting City/ ZIP in the main menu, switch
from the letter spe ller to the number spel ler to enter the zip code .
______________________________________________ N
_ a_v_i.:::
g:...
a_t_i_
o_n__;_
(N
__;_
A_V
__;_
) __ lftll
When you confirm a special dest ination selection, it is imported as
a new navigation destination.

Nearest to position
This special destination refers to the area immediate ly surrounding
the current vehicle position. This function is especially helpfu l if you
want to make a stop before reaching your fina l destination.
Your list of specia l destinations is sorted in ascending order based
Fig. 159 Navigatio n: on the distance to your destination. The distance displayed for
Special dest inati ons
spec ial destinations is a straight -line dis t ance and can be consider -
ably less than the actual road distance .
- Press the INAV] function button .
In dest inat ion area
- In a destination input menu=> page 128, fi g. 149, enter
This special destination refers to the final destination (already deter-
another Country as app licable . mined) and is usefu l, for example, when you are looking for a nearby
- Select the item Special destination => page 128, f ig. 149 . hotel.

- To search special dest inations, select Near est to In new city

position , In destination area, In new city or In selected This specia l destination is not assigned to any previously selected
country => page 134, fig . 158. destinat ion. It relat es to the city entered w ith the spe ller ~ page 25.

- Selec t a category f rom the list=> fig . 159.
- Selec t SEARCH A-Z t o input the desired special destina -
tio n, or
- Select your des ir ed special destination from the list.
- Select Set as destination or Set as stopov er. The data
needed for navigating are automatically imported into
the navigation menu .
This function gives you an overview of existing special destinations
of a selected city .
In select ed count ry
This specia l dest inat ion is not assigned to any city or previous ly
selected destination. You wi ll receive a list of all possible special
dest inat ions in each country. For example, you could list all the
airports in a country.
C all : (Te le ph o ne numb e r)

- Select Start route guidance . The route is calculated and
the map disp lay is shown automatically.
Specia l destinations are particular destinations which can be
selected direct ly.
If your vehic le was equipped with a cell phone package * by the
factory, you can use t his function to call the spec ial desti nation tha t
was selected. This app lies to specia l destinations which have tele-
phone numbers stored on the navigation DVD. You can call a restau -
rant and reserve a table before setting off, for example . ~

·-.,,- .. NAV, INFO • •

• ....__N
_ a_v_i.;;::;
g_a_t_io
_ n_(N_A_V_) ----------------------------------------------

Ap pli es to vehicles : w ith Navigat ion syste m

[i ] Tips
• A function may not be selected ("greyed out") if it is not availab le
acco rding to the restrictions you have set, or if not permitted by
local circumstances .
• There may be entries which cannot be displayed fully in the MMI
Disp lay because they co nt ain too many letters and are too long . If
you select one of these entries using the control knob , a second
window wi ll open up afte r a few seconds . You w ill be given addi -
tiona l information about the selected entry in this window . •
Applie s to vehicl es: w ith Navig atio n syste m
Top destinations
Top destinations make destination input easier.
If you have designated top des t inations whe n making
entries in the direc t ory( => page 87 and => page 138), they
are li sted in single destin at ion mode below t he menu it em
St art route guidance . In t he rou t e p lan, yo u are shown t he
t op des t inat ions in t he des t inat ion inp ut me nu for st o p-
ove rs or fi nal destinat ion be low t he men u item Back to
route plan .
- Press the I NAV] fu nct ion button .
- Selec t your top desti nation from t he list in g in the dest i-
natio n in put menu . The data f or the destination are
impo rted as a destination or stopover.
Changing / Interrupting route guidance
Calculated destinations can be changed at any time.
Changing rout e guidan c e
- Press the INAV] f un ction button.
- Enter new des tin ation dat a for the single destinatio n
mode (ro ute witho ut stopover) or fo r th e route plan
(route w ith stopover) .
- Select Start route guidance , the new destina t ion w ill be
calcu lat ed and the ro ut e guidance w ill start .
Interrupting route guid a nce
- Press the INAV] f un ction button .
- Select Cancel route guidance .
When you start the entry of the new destination data, the current
route guida nce is interrupted. When you select Start route guidance
again, the new destination wi ll be calculated and the route guid -
ance w il l start.
To change the route criteria, the activated destination does not need
to be i nterrupted . The new route cr iter ia will auto m atically be taken
over and the destination wi ll be adjusted~ page 143.
When navigation guidance is interrupted, the entered data and
sett ings are saved.

If you have not specified top dest ina t ions, the destination
menu wil l display No top destination s found. •
input
[i ] Tips
Calculated destinations can also be changed in the map disp lay by
moving the crosshairs ~ pag e 145. •
_____________________________________________ N_a_v_i-g
==-a_t_i_
o_n_ (N
_ A_V_) __..

Memory control button • The list of previous destinations can be deleted in the Setup
Nav igation m enu ~ pag e 152. •
Ap pl ies to vehicles: wit h Navigati o n system

Previous destinations App lies to veh icles: w ith Navigat ion sys tem

The previous destinations are stored and can be loaded Top categories
directly as a navigation destination . The lis t of the top categories facilitates entering a destina-
tion in special situations.

Fig. 160 Navigation:

Desti nation
- Press the Memory control button in the navigation menu
~ page 726, fig. 148.
- Select Previou s destinations ~ fig. 160. You will see a list
of the most recently entered destinat ions . Thi s list is
updated automatically.
- Select your desired entry f rom the list. The da t a for the
destination are imported as a dest inat ion or stopover.
- Selec t St art route guid a nce.
[i ]T ips
• There may be entries which cannot be displayed fully in the MMI
Display because they contain too many lett ers and are too long. If
you select one of these entries using the control kno b, a second
window will open up after a few seconds . You wi ll be given addi-
tiona l informa t ion about the sel ect ed en t ry in t his window.
Fig. 161 Navigat ion:
Top cat egories
- Press the Memory control butto n in t he navigation menu .
- Select Top categories . You are given a list of suggestions
wit h categories f or useful special destinations.
- Select a catego ry, for example, Next parking lot
~ fig.16 1.
- Select a destinatio n from the list. The data for the desti -
nation are imported automat ically into the dest ination
input menu .
- Select Start route guidance .
The special destinations are sorted acco rd ing to distance from your
present location.
For examp le, if you select Next gas st at ion, gas sta t ions in t he area
wil l be displayed according to distance . _,.

'NAV,' INFO
..
-L ___:
N,::a
:::..:
v_:
ig~ a:.:
t.:.:
io::.n
::..:....
<
:N
.:.
.:.:
A
:..:..:
V:..:
>:..._
____________________________________________ _

The fol lowing top categories are available :

• Next par king lot
[i ] Tips
• Using Store in directory you can assign an entry in your directory
• Next gas sta t ion
to a dest ina t ion, or vice versa, you can assign an existing destina-
• Next Audi Service tion to an entry in your directory => page 138.
• Next hospital • • Administ ration of the directory data is handled through the Edit
directory function ~ page 739orthrough the INAME ) ma in function
~ page 82. •
App li es to ve hi cles : wit h N avigation system

Load from directory

App li es to veh icles: w ith Navi gation sys tem

Store in directory
The curren t destination can be stored in the directory.

Fig. 162 Navigat ion:

Load from directo ry

- Press the Memory control button in the navigatio n menu .

Fig. 163 Navigat ion:
Direct ory ca rd
- Selec t Load from dire ctory .
- Select you r desired destination from t he list, or - Enter a single destina t ion ~ page 129.
Select Find entry ~ fig . 162. - Press the Memory co ntrol button .
- Enter the name you are looking for using the speller - Select Store in directory.
~ page 25 or select one from the list .
- Select Create new entry and complete the directory card,
You can also edit an existing address. The current address will then or
be replaced .
- Select Find entry , to fil e the des t ination under an exist ing
directory card. .-,,
______________________________________________ N
_ a_v_i.;::
g;...
a_t_i_
o_n_ CN
_ A_V
_ >__ ffll
- If you want the address to appear in the Top Destinations Ap plies to vehi cles : wi th Navi gatio n system

list => page 128, fig. 149 in the main navigation menu, Edit directory
select Display as top destination => page 138, fig. 163
Directory entries can be edited afterwards.
and press the control knob. A check../ appears after the
option.
- Select Store entry .

Using Store in directory you can assign an entry in your directory to

a destination.
If you want to assign a destination to an entry already stored in your
directory, you must first enter the destination. Then select the entry
to be assigned using Store in directory and save it . The destination
Fig. 164 Navigation:
entered is assigned to this entry. Edit directory
If you already have a destination assigned to a directory entry, the
new destination will overwrite the old destination. - Press the Memory control button in the navigation menu .
In order to save a destination in the directory as a new address, you - Select Edit directory=> page 137, fig. 160.
must first give the address a name .
- To delete all directory entries with top destinations,
Addresses saved as top destinations are displayed in the navigation
choose Delete all entries, or
input menu and can be selected there=> page 136.
- To change a specific entry, select an entry from the list, or
[i] Tips - Select Find entry and select the desired entry using the
• Route plans (route with stopovers) can be stored using the Store speller. The directory card with all the stored data is
route function => page 140. displayed.
• Administration of the directory data is handled through the Edit - Make your revisions.
directory function => page 739orthrough thelNAME ] main function
=> page 82. • - Select Store entry. The changes are stored by the system.

Directory entries whose navigation destination was saved as a top

destination => page 138 appear in a list and can be edited.
By selecting a data field, a speller is automatically activated
=> page 25 which allows letters and numerals to be entered. •

·-.,,- .. NAV, INFO • •

• ....__ N
_ a_v_i.;;::;
g_a_t_io_ n_ (N_ A_V_ ) ----------------------------------------------

Applies to vehicles: w it h Navigat ion system
Load route
Routes that have been stored can also be loaded as a new
destination.
- Press the Memory control button in the navigation menu.
- Select Load route => page 137, fig. 160.
- Select the route that you would like to load from the list.
A route plan gives you the option of entering up to three stopovers
in addition to a destination => page 141. You can then drive to these
stopovers in the order you specify.
The order of the route entered is saved with final destination and
stopovers and can be load ed again as a new destination
=> page 140.
You can always change the route plan. You can select a destination
or a stopover by turning and pressing the control knob. Now you
can do the following : Change , Move , Delete or Restart => page 142.

- Select Start route guidance. If the Store route function is "greyed out", this means the route
memory is full. Delete those routes you no longer need .
After storing several route plans=> page 140, they can be loaded
with a few operating steps.
[i] Tips
If you have selected a stored route you can edit the destination as Individual destinations can be stored in the directory=> page 138. •
well as stopovers. When you select a destination or a stopover in a
route plan using the control knob, you can edit the route plan again
before starting route guidance=> page 142. • Ap pli es to vehicles: with Navigation sys tem

Delete route
Applies to vehicles : with Navigat ion system

Store route - Press the Memory control button in the navigation menu.

Once calculated, route plans can be saved with the route - Select Delete route.
criteria you entered and loaded later as a new destina- - Select the route to be deleted from the list.
tion.
- Press the control knob to delete the selected route. •
- Enter a route plan => page 131.
- Press the Memory control button in the navigation menu.
- Select Store route.
- Using the speller, enter the name for the route.
- Select OK in the speller. The route plan entered is saved.
______________________________________________ N
_ a_v_i.;::
g;...
a_t_io
_ n_ (N
_ A_V_ >_ ......

Route control button Select Route with stopov er ~ fig. 165 and enter your
driving route with up to three stopovers and destination
Appl ies to veh icles: w ith Navigat ion system address ~ page 131 if you would like to drive to stop-
Rout e with / without stopov er overs on the way to your destination.

You can visit up to three sto povers on the way to your - If you want the Navigation system to take you to your
destination . final destination without stopovers, select Route without
stopover and enter the address of your destination
~ page 129.

The system operates with the type of route guidance you selected
until it is changed . For example, if you have selected Route w ith
stopo ver, your route guidance will proceed with stopovers until you
select and confirm Route wi th out sto pover.

Route wi t h stopo ver

Fig. 165 Navigation : Select this option to be guided t o your final destination with stop-
Route w it h st opover overs.
Stopovers can also be special destinat ions => page 134.
Stopovers already entered can be deleted, changed or moved at any
time, or you can drive to them again => page 142.

Route with out st opover

Select this option to navigate directl y to your destination .

Fig. 166 Navigation :
Route plan
Only the type of route guidance which is not active at the
time is shown in the display as ava ilable.
- Press the Route co ntrol button in the navigation menu.
[i ] Tips
• If the menu for Rout e plan => fig. 166 is displayed when you call
up the main navigation function, then you are in route guidance
with stopovers . If you wish to switch to the main menu, select and
confirm Route without stopovers in the menu for the Rout e function.
• There may be entries which cannot be displayed fu lly in the MMI
Disp lay because they contain too many letters and are too long. If
you select one of these entries using the control knob, a second
window wi ll open up after a few seconds. You wi ll be g iven add i-
tional information about the selected entry in this window. •

'NAV,.INFO
'.
• .___ N_a
_ v_ig=-a_t _io_n
_ (_N_A
_ V_>_____________________________________________ _

Applies to vehicles: w it h Navigat ion system App lies to vehicles: with Navigat ion system

Changing route plan Route list

The route list provides you with details of the route you
Select a destinatio n/stopover from a route pla n by
are going to drive.
rotating and pressing the control knob.
Select Change, Move , Delete or Restart and ed it your
destination/stopover .

Change: Here you are entering new navigation data for your desti -
nation or stopover .
Mov e: Here you are reordering the sequence of your destination and
stopovers .
Delete : The selected destination or stopover can be deleted. If you Fig. 167 Navigation :
delete a destination, the system will automatically select a stopover Route list
and make that your new destination .
Restart : After you have been guided to your destination, you can
Press the Route control button in the naviga t ion menu.
drive once more from your present position to a destination or stop - - Selec t Route list => page 141, fig . 165. The detaile d rou t e
over that you have already reached. This function is not availab le if list appears=> fig . 167.
you load the route plan from the directory . •
The route list provides you with the fol lowing information :
• Notes on the route
• Distance information
• Street designations
• City names

[i ] Tips
If route guidance is not activa t ed, Route list will be "greyed o ut". •
______________________________________________ N
_ a_v_i.;::
g;...
a_t_io
_ n_ (N
_ A_V_ >_ ..... 111
App lies to veh icl es: w it h Navigati o n sys tem Ferry
Route criteria Comprises the options include and minimize . With Ferry minimize
an attempt is made not to include any stretch which includes a ferry
Route calculation depends on the route criteria selected.
connection when calculating the route .

Toll road
Comprises the options include and minimize . With Toll road
minimize an effort is made when calculating the route to avoid any
stretches with roads which you have to pay to drive on .

[i] Tips
Fig. 168 Navigation : If you select a route criterion that will not allow you to reach your
Listing of the possible destination (e.g. Toll road minimize), and the destination is only
route criteria
reachable by a toll road , then toll roads will still be used in the route
calculation. •
- Press the Route control button in the navigation menu.
- Select Route criteria. Appli es to vehi cles: wi th Navi gat ion system

Highlight your desired route criteria::::::;,fig. 168. Avoid route

The route criteria can be changed during route guidance and the
route can be recalculated .
You have the following route criteria available to you:

Route options
The Navigation system can calculate the route according to the
shortest or fastest route. Select short if the Navigation system is
supposed to consider all street categories when calculating route
guidance=> page 125. Fig. 169 Navigation :
Avoid section of route
Highway
Comprises the options include and minimize . With Highway Press the Route control button in the navigation menu.
minimize, an attempt is made to avoid sections of freeway when
calculating the route . Select Avoid route from here ::::::;,
fig. 169. I),

'NAV,'INFO
.'
llffl.___ N_a_ v_ig=-a_t_io_n
_ (_N_A
_ V_>_____________________________________________ _

- Select t he length of the route to be avoided by turning Map control button

the control knob. Once you have selected the length of
the route to be avoided, a check../ w ill appear after this App li es to vehi cles: w ith Navigatio n system
option ~ page 143, fig . 169. Map and information display
- To deactivate this opt ion, select Avoid route from here
again , the check mark ../ is removed . The Navigation
system calculates the next opportunity for returning you
to the route you previously selected.

The Navigat ion system wi ll calculate an alterna ti ve route for the

section of the route you wish to avoid .
If you stop the route guidance and then start it again, t hen the Fig . 170 Navig ati on :
Exampl e of map
"avoid route from here" w ill be cancelled and wi ll have to be reacti - di sp lay wi th in act ive
,Nnu.ln<f,,
vated again if desired . sid e m enu

[i J Tip s
Th e map in the
inform a tion:
MMI D is pla y cont ai n s the following

The Navigation system can calculate a route only if detai ls

regarding the local situation are available . If a detour is not Legend Option
possible , the Navigation syst em will not offer an alternative route. •
0 Orientation=> page 145

0 Zoom scale of the map => page 145

© Distance to destination

0 Estimated time of arrival

© Vehicle symbo l

© Example of select ed map conten t s=> page 150

Destination - Menu f or entering change in desti-
0 nation => page 129, fig. 150 or route p lan
=> page 131, fig. 154

The map display modes => page 147 can also be changed . ..,
______________________________________________ N
_ a_v_i.;::
g;...
a_t_io
_ n_ (N JIII
_ A_V_ >_ .....

Crosshairs with se lection rectangle => page 745wi ll help you select Ap plies to vehi cles: w ith Navigat io n syste m

your destination on th e map. Map side menu

Destination guidance is shown in the instrument cluster disp lay The map display is operated with the activated side menu.
=> page 124 using direc t ion arrows . •

Ap pl ies to vehicles: with Navi gation sys tem

Map zoom
The map scale can be changed.
- Press the M ap control button in the navigation menu.
Rotate the contro l knob counterclockwise to zoom into Fig. 171 Navigation :
M ap display wit h acti -
the map (sma ll er scale, display of details). vated side menu

Rotate the cont rol knob clockwise, to zoom out of t he

map (larger scale , more overview) .

If you enlarge cur. positio n the mileage sca le to greater than 30

miles , t he map will be shown pointing north => page 149.
When you zoom in the overvi ew map us ing the control button, the
map will return to its original format after a few minutes .
When t he map side m enu is on => fig . 171 , you can zoom the map by Fig. 172 Navigat ion:
selecting the second menu point => page 145. • Call in map position
menu

Press the M ap contro l but t on in the nav igat io n me nu .

Press the control knob to switch to the side menu
=>fig . 171.
Select your desired submenu top ic.
Rotate and press the control kno b to operate a map
menu top ic.
Press the [ RETURN ] button, t o leave t he map side menu . lJ,>

'NAV,"INFO
..
• ....__N
_ a_v_i.;;::;
g_a_t_io
_ n_(N_A_V_) ----------------------------------------------

The fol lowing functions can be carr ied out us ing the map side
menu:
G) O ri e nt a ti o n
If north is selected, the map display is always oriented north. The
directiona l arrow on the veh ic le symbo l rotates accord i ng ly.
When direction of travel is selected, the vehicle symbo l always
points up and the map rotates acco rding t o changes in the vehicle's
direction~ page 149.
0 Z oom s ca le
You can change the scale of the map disp lay by rotating the control
knob .
Select the arrow symbol © by rotating and press ing the control
knob to move the crosshairs horizontally first . Pressing the control
knob once aga i n takes you ou t of cross hai rs adjustme nt .
After you have established a point on the map, you can Set as
destination , Set as stopover , Store to directory or Call* t h is point by
confirming the third map menu point in the activated side menu.
© Mo v e along the route
This function can be used whi le route guidance is active . Turning
the contro l knob to t he left moves the map to the starting po int for
the current route guidance . Turning the control knob to the right
moves the map to the fina l dest ina t ion for the current route guid -
ance.

G) M a p po s iti o n m e nu © Geo -c oordinate s

If a point on the map is redefined by moving the crosshairs, it can
be set as a new destination, as a stopover on a route with stopovers
or stored to the directory ::::>page 138. Any more detai led informa-
tion that exists for the selected point on the map wil l appear in the
MMI Disp lay. If t he se lected point is a special dest inat io n with a tele -
phone number, this number can be cal led*.
You can also specify a new point on the map by moving the
crosshairs. This new point can then be Set as dest inati on, Set as
stopover or you can Store to directory or Call* .
You can use the Set as stopo ver function if you have spec ified a
"Route with stopover"=> page 141.
You can use the "Call: (t elephone numbe r)" function ~ page 145,
fig. 172 if your vehic le is equipped with a cell phone package* by the
factory .
The geographica l data (latitude and longitude) for the location
selected at the intersection of the crosshears appear .
0 M a p co ntent
If you use t he intersection of the crosshairs to select a map content
symbo l, a separate window appears for the selected map content
displaying t he address and (w here availab le) the te leph o ne num b er.
This information will on ly be displayed if the information for the
selected map content is stored on the navigation DVD.
[i ] Tips
Adjustments made in the act ivated side menu are not stored after
you have deactivated the side menu. Use Setup Navigation to store
your settings ~ page 147. •

You wil l receive position information regard ing your vehicle and the
destination .

© M o vin g the c ross h a irs

A new destination or stopover can be set using the map by moving
the crosshairs hor izo ntally and vert ically.
_____________________________________________ N_a_v_i..;:
g:;...
a_t_i_
o_n_ (N
_ A_V_) __..

Nav-lnfo control button • Distance from destination

• Location of your vehicle
Appl ies to veh icles: w ith Navigat ion system • Geographic destination data (latitude, longitude)
Information data • Geographic location of your vehicle (latitude, long itude, altitude)
Location and destination information can both be • Received satellites
displayed and the last navigation announcement can be The last navigation announcement will also be repeated .
repeated.
Call: (Telephone number)*
If your vehicle was equipped with a cell phone package* by the
factory, you can use this function to call the special destination that
was selected ~ fig. 173. This applies to special destinations which
have telephone numbers stored on the navigation DVD. You can cal l
a restaurant and reserve a table before setting off, for example. •

Fig. 173 Navigation : Setup Navigation

Displaying the destina-
tion App lies to ve hi cles: with Navi gation syst em

Opening and closing Setup

Fig. 174 Navigation :

Geographic informa-
tion (latitude, longi-
tude , altitude)
Fig. 175 Navigation
setup: Main menu
- Press the Nav-lnfo control button in the navigation menu.

Your destination will be displayed listing the following information: In a navigation menu, press the [SETUP]function button
to open the main Setup menu for the navigation function
• Destination/Stopovers
=>fig. 175. ~
• Estimated time of arrival
- N av igation (NAV )
'----- -=-
-----------------------------------------------------
Press the !SETUP ] button again to close the main Setup App li es to vehicles : wi th Navigati on syste m

men u again. Map scheme

Th e foll o wing s e ttin g s a re p oss ibl e in Set up Navigation: The map displ ay can be ch anged according to driving
• Map scheme ~ page 148 conditions (day/night).
• Map orientation ~ page 149
• Intersection zoom~ page 149
• Map view ~ page 150
• Map content ~ page 150
• Voice guidance~ page 151
• Altitude display ~ page 152
• Delete previous destinations ~ page 152
Fig . 176 Navigation :
• Enter NAV start location~ page 153
Night map
• Demo mode ~ page 153
• Version information~ page 153 Press the [SETUP) funct ion button in the nav igation
The time/date, sound and settings functions and the brightness of men u.
t he display can be adjusted using the con t rol buttons~ page 160. - Select t he desired setting und er Map scheme
=> page 147, fi g. 175.
[i J Tip s
day
We recommend that you enter these settings when the vehicle is
stationary. Please note ~ page 10, "Notes on Traffic Safety". • The background for the map is shown light . This makes map
f eatures easy to recognize . The dayti me view is optimized for
ambient light~ page 144, fig. 170.

night
The background for the map is shown dark . This provides a glare -
free v iew of the map. The street names and their layout , place
names and map contents are in contrasting light colors~ fig . 176.

automatic
The map scheme changes automatically from day to night disp lay
when the low- beam lights are turned on . •
______________________________________________ N
_ a_v_i.;::
g;...
a_t_io
_ n_ (N IIJI
_ A_V_ >_ .....

Appl ies to veh icl es: w it h Navigat ion system App lies to vehicles : with Navigation system

Map orientation Intersection zoom

The scale of the mop con be reduced automatically at
intersections .
1:1
~

, -JI)
ByronAve

w
Fig. 177 Navigat ion:
Orientat ion - north
Fig. 178 Navigation
setup: Intersecti on
Press the {SETUP) function button in the navigation zoom
menu .
Selec t the desired setting under Orientation . - Press the {SETUP) function button in the navigation
menu.
north
- Under Int ersect . zoom , select on ::::>
fig . 178. Intersection
The map display is always oriented north, the directional arrow on
zoom is switched on.
the vehicle symbol rotates accordingly ~ fig . 177.
- Under Int ersect . zoom , select off :::;,fig. 178. Intersection
dir. of t ravel
zoom is switched off .
With a map scale of 50 yd - 30 mi the vehicle symbol always points
up and the map rotates according to changes in the vehicle's direc- For a more detai led display, the map automatically zooms in at
tion . street intersections, enhancing the view of the route from street to
street . In addition, the map is aligned in the direc t ion of travel
auto mati c
~ page 149 when switched to zoom mode . The map also automati-
The map is oriented according to the selected scale. Less than cal ly zooms in when you are getting close to your destination.
1.0 mi in dir. of t ravel orientation and greater than 1.0 mi in the
north orientation . •
When the map zooms in on intersections, the map symbols will
disappear to make it easier for you to read the map ~ page 150.
When you nav igate to a special destination ~ page 134, the symbol
remains visible. •

'NAV,.INFO
..
_.___ N_a
_ v_ig=-a_t_io_n
_ (_N_A
_ V_>_____________________________________________ _

Applies to vehicles: w it h Navigat ion system When you select this map display, the map view will automatically
Map view show north => page 149.

You may also choose between various map displays. If you zoom in on the map in "Overview" mode, the map illustration
will remain in this selected Zoom level for a short period of time .
Subsequently the system will automatically change back to the map
overview .

[i ] Tips
If your vehicle is equipped with a speech dialog system*, the DETAIL
MAP view is additionally available to you => page 178. •

Fig. 179 Navigation

setup: Map view over- App li es to vehicles: with Navigation system
view
Map content
Press the !SETUP) function button in the navigation In addition to the information that is displayed automati-
menu. cally, the map can also display other additional informa-
Select the desired map display under map view tion.
=> page 149, fig. 178.

The following settings are possible:

Destination
The map display shows your destination. The destination is marked
with a destination flag .
When you select this map display, the map will be shown pointing
Fig. 180 Navigation
north. setup: Selection from
the map contents list
Current position
The map display shows the current vehicle position . Scale and Turning on filter options
orientation of the map do not change.
- Press the !SETUP) function button in the navigation
Overview menu.
This map display shows the current vehicle position and the
remainder of the route guidance.
 N av iga tion (NAV ) -
-----------------=--
- Under M ap content , selec t the add itional information to Ap plies to vehi cles: w ith Navigat ion syst em

be displayed and press the control knob . A check./ w ill Voice guidance
appear after the fi lte r option , or
Voice guidance during navigation can be turned off as
- Select All Cat egorie s to put a check./ next to all availab le needed.
categories ~ page 150, fi g. 180.

Turning o ff indi v idu a l f ilt e r options

- Press the [ SETUP ) functio n bu t ton in the navigation
menu .
- Under Map content select the ind ividual cat egories t hat
shou ld no longer be active and press the control knob.
The check./ after the corresponding category is no
Fig. 181 Navigat ion
longer displayed ~ page 150, fig. 180. setup: Voice guidance

Tu r ning o ff a ll f ilt e rs - Press the [ SET U P) function button in the navigation

- Press the [ SETUP ) function button in the navigation
men u.
- First select t he filter All categories and press the control
knob so that a check./ appears afte r All cat egories. At
the same time , a check./ will appear after each filter
option .
- If you press the contro l knob again, the checks./ after all
the filter options disappear ~ page 150, fig . 180.
[i ] Tips
When zooming i n on intersections, the map symbols will disapp ear.
This makes it easier to read the map=> page 149. •
menu .
- Select the desired setting under Voi ce guid ance
~ fig . 181.
If you select the on setting, voice messages will be output whi le you
are being guided to your destina t ion .
If you se lect the off (phone)* setti ng, voice messages will be output
while you are being guided to your dest ina t ion, and will not be
outpu t du ring a tel ephone ca ll.
If you select the off setting, voice messages will not be output while
you are being guide d t o t he destination . •

'NAV,' INFO
..
 N av igation (NAV )
-
.____-=-----------------
Applies to vehicles: w it h Navigat ion system App lies to vehicles: with Navigat ion system

Altitude display Delete previous destinations

The altitude of the current location can be shown on the
map.

Fig. 183 Navi gation

setup : Delet e prev.
destinat ions

Fig. 182 Navigatio n

set up: Alt itude display - Press t he !SE T UP] f unct ion button in the navigation
me nu.
- Press the !SETUP] function button in the nav igation Select Delete prev. destinations.
men u.
- Confi rm Delete individually ~ fig . 183 to delete d estina -
- Under Altitude display, select on. The altitude G) t ions from the list individually.
~ fig. 182 is displayed on the map.
- Select Delete all ~ fi g . 183 t o pe rmanently delete the
- Under Altitude display, select off. The alt itude is not entire list .
displayed on the ma p.
Selecting the Delete all function also deletes the list of cities you
have entered previously in the speller=> page 129 and=> page 131.
[i J Tips
The altitude cannot be determined when GPS reception is not avail -
able (e.g . in a tunne l). [i J Tips
• The altitude in the MM I Disp lay can be displayed in feet (ft.) or There wil l be no confirmation request when deleting an entry . Be
meters (m) ~ page 162. • sure that you indeed want to delete the selected destination . •
 Navigation (NAV) -
----------------=-----m-1
Appl ies to veh icles: w ith Navigat ion system App lies to veh icles : with Navigation system

Enter NAV start location Demo mode

The route can be calculated from another position than
Press the ISETUP] function button in the navigation
the present vehicle location.
menu.
- Under Demo mode, select on.

The Demo mode provides a simulation of the route you entered. This
allows you to effectively plan and display your destination by
showing specific map content=> page 150 or route criteria
=> page 143. •

Fig. 184 Navigation

App li es to veh icles : with Navigation system
setup: Enter NAV start
location Version information
The current software version can be displayed.
- Press the !SETUP] function button in the navigation
menu . Press the [SETUP] function button on the navigation
- Select Enter NAV start location. menu.

- Enter the vehicle position =>fig. 184. - Select Version information. •

- Start guidance to your destination.

- Select Demo mode => page 153.

You may enter the vehicle position manually, for example, to calcu -
late future routes with a different starting point.
If you have manually entered your starting point, you can also set a
Distance from a specific intersection. Turn and press the control
knob to set different distances to the intersection using "ahead" or
"back".
If you have manually entered the vehicle position, you can enter the
destination data. Start the destination in the demo mode to simu -
late guidance=> page 153. •

·-.,,- .. NAV, INFO • •

• .___l_
n_fo_ r_
m_a
_ ti_o_n_ (_IN
_ F_O_)____________________________________________ _

Information (INFO)

Introduction Main information menu

Applies to vehicles: with N avigati on system Applies to vehicles: with Navigati on system

Selecting information function Information data

Navigation inf ormation can be selected using t he( INFO]
button .
- Pressthe [ INFO]function button ~ page 15tod isp laythe
main information me nu => fig. 185.
Location and destination information can both be
displayed an d the last naviga tion ann o uncement can be
repea ted.

The main information menu displays the same informa t ion as in the
main function [ NAV] once the control button for the Nav-lnfo is
pressed. •

Fig. 185 Info:

Displaying t he destina -
ti on

- Press the [INFO] function button to display the main

information menu~ fig. 185.

The main information menu provides a display of your destination

with the following data :
• Destination/Stopover
• Estimated time of arriva l
• Distance from destination
• Location data of your veh icle (for example: street, city)
• Geographic destination data (latitude, longitude)
• Geographic location of your vehic le (latitude, longitude, altitude)
• Received satel lites .,
________________ Inf o rm a ti o n (INFO) -ltilfllll

The last navigation announcement will also be repeated.

C all: (Te le phon e numb er)*

If your vehicle was equ ipped with a ce ll phone package* by the
factory, you can use this function to ca ll the specia l destination that
was selected => page 154, fig . 185. This applies to special dest ina-
tions which have te lephone numbers stored on the navigation DVD.
You can ca ll a restaurant and reserve a table before sett ing off, f or
examp le.

[i ] Tip s
The control buttons of the setup function will be displayed if you
press the [SE T UP I button in the information menu => page 160. •

·-.,,- .. NAV, INFO • •

CAR, SETUP -
lffl.___ V_e
_ h_ic_le_ s_e_tt_ in_g
=-s_C
_C_A
_ R_>__________________________________________ _

Vehicle settings (CAR)

General safety precautions The following submenu are available in the car
function:
We recommend entering vehicle settings only when the vehicle is Control button
stationary. The procedures described below could distract you from functions Car submenus
traffic if performed while driving. Please note => page 10. • ~ fig. 186

Adaptive Cruise Control*

Selecting car function Audi braking guard*
Audi parking system*
The vehicle settings can be selected using the [CAR] func- Audi side assist*
tion button. Background lighting*
Central locking
0 Exterior lighting *
Systems albl Instrument cluster
Seat adjustmenr "
Service indicator
Tire pressure monitoring system *
Vehicle ID Number
Windows
Windshield wipers
Fig. 186 MMI Display:
Main car menu
@ Softwa re status ~ page 159
Version

Press the [ CAR]function button:::::;, page 15. The main car a> A comprehens ive description of these systems can be found in the owner's
manual of your vehicle.
menu:::::;,fig. 186 or the previous active car function menu
bl If your vehicle is not equipped with an "A daptive Air Suspension", the
appears in t he MMI Display. system settings are shown in the main car menu. A comprehensive desc rip-
tion of these systems can be found in the owner's manual of your vehicle .
Press one of the control buttons :::::;,
page 16 to move to
the appropriate submenus G) or @ :::::;, fig. 186.
____________________________________________ V
_ e_h_i_c_le
_ s_e_ t_t_i_n..;:
g:;;..
s_ (C_ A_R
_ >__ ftll
The following submenus are available in the car setup
function:

Car setup submenusa>

Press the [SETUP!

Lower vehicle for loading*
function button in
Trailer towing mode*
the Car function
Vehicle jack mode*
•
Version
This menu displays the hardware and software status of
the MM/.
- Press the ICAR I functi on button.
- Press the Version control button. •

·-.,,- .. CAR.SETUP
_.___ S_E_T_U_P
_______________________________________________ _

SETUP

Introduction menu items for the main function in question . By pressing the
control buttons, the Setup submenus Settings , Sound and Display
can be opened. These Set up submenus are always the same,
General safety precautions
regardless of which Setup main function you are in .

Enter vehicle settings only when the vehicle is stationary. The The following submenus are available in the setup
procedures described below would distract your attention from function:
traffic if you performed them while driving. Please note
~ page 10.• Control button
fun cti o ns Setup submenus
~ fi g. 187
Sele c ting setup function
Time
0 Date
Time format
Time/Date
Date format
Menu language
© Measurement units
Setting s Speech dialog system*
Facto ry settings

Fig. 187 MMI Display: Balance

Main menu - Setup Fader
Radio © Treble
Sound Bass
~ pag e 77
If you press the [ SETUP] function button in addition to a Dspal BOSE
function button that has already been pressed. The main Volume settings
setup menu belonging to the pr imary funct ion (e.g. radio)
~ fig. 187 is displayed . © Brightness
Display
- Press one of the control buttons in a Setup ma in menu al Digita l Sign al Processing
~ page 16to go to the submenus for the Setup function
(in the example Radio (D to 0 ~ fig. 187).
[i ] Tips
The setup menu works only in conjunction with a function button You can read about system-specific setup settings functions in the
that has been pressed previously ~ page 15 and opens additional desc ription for each primary funct ion . •
______________________________________________ S_E_T_U
_P_ __,_

Time / Date control button Setting date format

- Press the Time/Date control button in the setup menu.
Time / Date format
- Select Date format ::::>fig. 188.
Time of day and date can be adjusted through the preset
- Choose between the display MM/DD for the format
formats.
"Month/Day" or DD.MM for the format "Day.Month".

By pressing the control knob the display jumps to the next entry
field for date and time of day.
You have to set date and time of day in the MMI. The current da t a
will not be transferred to the instrument cluster until you do so.

[i] Tips
Fig . 188 Setup :
If you enter a new time zone with your vehicle, you have to adjust
Time/Date format the time display manually to local time. •

Setting time of day

Settings control button
- Press the Time/Date control button in the setup menu .
- Select Time ::::>
fig. 188. Setting the menu language
- Rotate and press the control knob to set the time of day. Display texts can be shown in different languages.

Setting the date

- Press the Time/Date control button in the setup menu.
- Select Date => fig. 188.
- Rotate and press the control knob to set the date.

Setting time format

Fig. 189 Setup :
- Press the Time/Date control button in the setup menu. Setting display
language
- Select Time format => fig . 188.
Choose between the display 12h and 24h. - Press the Settings control button in the setup menu.

CAR,SETUP
-L ....:
S~E=T
-~U
~P~ -----------------------------------------

- Select M enu lang uage=> page 161, fig. 189. For distance, you can select mile s or km .

- Select t he desired me nu language. For speed, you can select mph or km/ h.
For temperature, you can select °F or °C.
All messages in the MMI Display are converted to the selected
language. In addition, you can change the language of navigation For pressure, you can se lect psi or bar .
messages spoken, if your vehicle is equipped w ith the Navigation
system*. [i ] Tips
The following languages can be selected: If you change the measurement unit for the distance, the measure-
• English ment unit for the altitude display is automatical ly changed in the
Navigation* as we ll ~ page 152.
• Spanish
• The selected measurement units appear in the MMI Disp lay, in
• French •
the instrument cluster and in the air conditioning system display. •

Selecting measurement units Applies to vehic les: with speech dia log system

Units for temperature, distance, pressure and speed can Speech dialog system
be converted to the standard of the particular country. Making settings for the speech dialog system.

Fig. 190 Setu p:

Fig. 191 Setu p :
Select ing meas ure-
Setti ngs fo r the speech
ment units
dialo g syste m

Press the Sett ings control button in the setup menu. Press the Setting s control button in the setup menu.
- Select M easurem ent units => page 161, fig . 189. Select Speech dialog system .
- Select Dist ance, Speed , Temperature or Pressure. Select the desired menu item .
- Select the measurement unit to be displayed.
The following menu items are available:
______________________________________________ S_E_T_U
_P_ __,f
Repeat command
If this function is activated, the commands for a switch into another
main func t ion (e.g. RADIO) are repea t ed by the speech dialog
system before they are carried out.

Delete all name tags

All the "name tags" (individual descriptions) you assigned and
stored using the speech dialog system are deleted.
Fig. 193 Setu p:
Confirm selection
[i ] Tips
You can read more detailed information on the speech dialog - Press the Settings control button in the setup menu.
system starting in=> page 165. •
- Select Factory settings .

Factory se tt ings - Select in dividua l systems=> fig. 192, or

- Select Select all. All possible systems are selected.
- Select Confirm selection => fig. 193.
- Under the menu item Reset system to factory presets?,
select Yes to reset the settings to the factory setting.

This option resets adjustable functions to their factory settings.

MMI settings
Fig. 192 Setup : The factory settings for the menu language => page 161, the
Factory settings measurement units=> page 162, and the time=> page 161 are
restored.

Sound settings
The factory setting for the sound settings => page 77 is restored.

Radio
The stored stations in the radio presetlist => page 51 and the
"Previous stations"=> page 48will be erased . The factory setting for
the "Category filters" => page 61 will be restored. I),,

CAR, SETUP
• .___ S_E_T_U_P_____________________________________________ _

CD - Rotate the control knob clockwise to increase brightness.

The factory sett ing for the CD Setup functions~ page 69 will be
- Rotate the control knob counterclockwise to reduce
restored.
brightness.
Telephone*
The setting is retained even when you shift to another menu. •
The phone numbers stored in the "Dialed numbers", "Received
calls", or "Missed calls" call lists will be erased ~ page 103.

Navigation settings*
The settings in Setup Navigation ~ page 147(e. g. "Voice guid -
ance" , "Map scheme" , "Map orientation" , etc.) and "Route criteria"
~ page 143 are restored to the factory settings .

Navigation memory*
Entries saved in Navigation (e.g. Previous destinations, saved
routes , data in the destination input menu, previously entered
cities) are restored to the factory settings. •

Display control button

Brightne ss
You can set display brightness manually.

Fig. 194 Setup:

Adjusting the bright-
ness of the display

- Press the Display control button in the setup menu.

______________________________________________ S--'p
'---
e_e_c_h
_ d
_ ia_lo--'g
=-s_y
"--s_t_
e_m
__ ffll
Speech dialog system( ¢'.<<
)

Introduction Af t er each sequence of numbers (separa t ed by a short pause in

speech), the numbers recognized are repeated by the system . The
App lies to vehicl es: w it h mu lt i-func ti on st eering wh eel and speec h di alo g syste m
system does not recognize combinations of numbers (for example,
twenty three), on ly digits spoken in dividua lly (two , three ). •
What is the best way for the speech dialog
system to understand you?
Ap plies to ve hicles: w ith mu lti-func tion steer ing whee l and s peech d ialog syst em
Here are some points to keep in mind so that you can be
Requirements for activating the speech
understoo d clearly.
dialog system
• Speak clear ly, at a normal vo lume, without excessive
em phasis/pauses as you wou ld sp eak to another pers o n. If t he system responds w ith the vo ice message <Function not
• Wait until the speech dialog system has finished asking a ques- possible> , check the operating status of the voice operation:
t ion or mak ing a statement before yo u start spea ki ng or answer ing. • The ignition must be switched on .
• If necessary, speak a little louder if it is noisy inside or outside • The MM I must be active .
your veh icle.
• The MM I Disp lay does not show any info rmatio n regarding
• On ly you, the driver, should use the system since the micro - temperature .
phone is directed toward the driver's position.
• No telephone cal l* at this time .
• You sho uld choose t he spoken names so that the voice recog ni -
The speech dialog system is activated by pressing the Talk Button
tion can clear ly distingu ish them.
!¢:<<
) => page 19. The d ialog begins aft er yo ur hear the ch ime <Beep>.
• Avo id any secondary noise in the ve hicle (e.g . vehicle o ccupan t s
speaking at the same time) while you are speaking.
• Do not d irect the air d istr ibu t ion ve nts t oward the microphone [i ] Tips
located in the roof module. With excessive secondary noise, the recognition ability of the
• Avoid outs ide noise wh ich can inter f ere wit h the system by speech dia log system may be limited . •
closing doors, windows and the sunroof * .
Ap plies to ve hicles: w ith mu lti-funct ion steer ing whee l and s peech d ialo g syst em
Tip s f o r Entering Numb e rs
When entering phone numbers, the numbers zero to nine are recog -
General information
nized. Enter the telephone numbers as a seque nce of d ig its (sepa- Numerous functions in the MM/ can be conveniently used
rated by short pauses) or by numbers spoken individua lly. Say using the speech dialog system .
phone numbers just as you would if yo u were te lli ng a person a
phone number. The speech dialog system all ows o perati o n of the fol lowi ng func -
tions by voice commands: .,

·-.,,- .. CAR,SETUP
• ....__S
....:..
p_e_e_c
_ h_ d_ia
_ lo....;::
g'---
s-'-
y_s_t_e_m
_____________________________________________ _

• Radio App li es to veh icles: w ith mult i-funct ion steer ing whee l and speech d ialog system

• CD change r* The dialog

• Directory
The period in which the speech dialog system is ready to receive
• Telephone*
voice commands is call ed DIALOG in this manual. The speech dia log
• Navigation system* system gives audible feedback and guides you through the function
Different help functions are also availab le. as required.

You have the option of accessing the internal directory through the With incoming te lephone cal ls* or any other MM I operation, the
speech dia log system . For example, you can access frequently dialog is term inat ed im mediate ly.
needed telephone numbers or addresses through a free ly assigned All f unctions continue to be manually operable through the MM I
name tag => page 169. Termina l in the center console. •
If your vehicle is equipped wit h a Navigation syst em*, you can select
navigation destinations* through the speech dialog system, and
navigate to t hese destinations. The map display can be ope ned and Using the speech dialog system
the scale of the map can be changed=> page 178.
App lies to vehic les: with mul ti-funct ion steer ing whee l and speech d ialog system
If you have activated a main MMI function (e.g . radio), you can give
different commands (e.g. NEXT STATION ) f or th is act ivated main Activating/deactivating the speech dialog
function. system
In additio n, it is also po ssib le to switch main f unctions usi ng
commands=> page 168.
The speech dialog system recognizes commands and number
sequences independently of the speaker at the t i me.
At almost any time in a dialog, you can open a help text or a range
of co mmands f or t he curre nt f unction using the HELP command
=> page 773.
Fig. 195 MMI Display:

& WARNING Mute symb ol in the

status bar
The speech dialog system should not be used in emergen cies,
since the voice can change in stre ssful situation s. The result can Activating the speech dialog system
be that the desired telephone connection * does not go through - Briefly press the Talk Button [<:(<<]@ => page 167, fig. 196
under certain circumstances or does not go through quickly
on the mul t i-func t ion st eering whee l. The chime <Beep>
enough. Dial the emergen cy number manuall y. •
sou nds . The speech dialog system is ready. _.,
____________________________________________ S
....:...
p_e_e_c_h
_ d
_ ia_l_o..:g::...._
s_,y'-s_t_e_m
__ __,_

- Say the desired command. The volume of the announcements for the speech dialog
system can be changed and adjusted to the changing
Deactivating the speech dialog system ambient noises in the vehicle.
- Briefly press the Talk Button[ ¢<<
<]@ ~ fig. 196 until you Roll the right thumbwheel on the multi-function steering
hear the message <Cancel>, or wheel up @ ~to increase the volume.
- Say the command CANCEL. Roll the right thumbwheel on the multi-function steering
As soon as the speech dialog system sounds a chime <Beep>, t he wheel down @ A, to lower the volume.
system is ready for the dialog.
While t he speech dialog system is act ive, the active audio source [i] Tips
(e.g. radio) is muted => page 14. Muting is ind icated by th e mute Alternatively, you can also adjust the volume by rotating the ON/OFF
symbol G) =>page 166, fig. 195 in the status bar. knob=> page 14. •

[i] Tips Ap p lies to vehicles: w ith multi- funct ion steeri ng w heel and speech dia log syst em

The speech dialog system can also be deactivated by pressing any Setting basic volume
button in the MMI Terminal in the cent er console => page 12. •
The basic volume of the speech dialog system can be
adjusted through the MM/.
Ap pl ies to vehi cles: with mult i-function stee ring whee l and speech dia log system

Adjusting the volume (::ta/:A )

@
Fig. 197 MMI Display:
Setting basic volume in
the setup menu

The basic volume for announcements from the speech

Fig. 196 Multi-func- dialog system can be changed and adjusted to changing
tion steering wheel:
Talk Button and right ambient noise in the vehicle.
thumbwheel

CAR,SETUP
• ....__S
....:..
p_e_e_c
_ h_d_ia
_ lo....;::
g'---
s-'-
y_s_t_e_m
_____________________________________________ _

- Press the Sound control button in a radio, CD or setup The new vo lume sett ing is stored. Announcements from the speec h
men u. dialog system are broadcast at this volume also when the MMI is
act iva t ed again.
- Select Volum e setting s.
Whi le the volume is being adjusted, the system automatically
- Selec t Spee ch dialog system ~ page 167, fig. 197. broadcasts a test message. •

- Rotate the control knob to adjust the volume to your

liki ng .

Applies to vehi cl es: with mu lt i-funct ion steer ing wheel and spee ch dia log system

Switching sources
The main function can be changed using these commands .
You can switch to a particular main function using the RADIO, CD, additional equipment -specific voice commands within a main func -
DIRECTORY, TELEPHONE *, NAV IGATION * co m mands . You can give tion (e.g . rad io).

Example of s witching sources :

C omm a nd Requir e ment Spee c ln dialog sy stem mes- Spe e ch dialog s yst e m a ctivity
sag e
E.g. RADIO MM I active <Radio> The radio becomes the active sou rce .
CD MM I active <CD> The CD changer becomes the active
source .
DIRECTORY MM I active <Directory > The d irectory is opened .
TELEPHONE* MM I active <Telephone> The telephone* becomes the active
source .
NAVIGATION * MM I active <Navig ation> The Navigation system* becomes t he
active source.

Following a switch of source, the speech dialog syst em re mains you can then say the comma nd DIAL NUMBER without pressing the
act ive for about 5 seconds. Th is all ows you to say another command Talk Button [<(<
1 ] again.

without pressing the Talk Button [Q'.c, ] again. For examp le, if you Whi le the speech dia log system is active, the active audio source
switc h to the telep hone funct ion using the command T ELEPHONE ,
(e.g . rad io) is muted => page 14. Mut ing is shown by t he m ute
symbo l in the status bar (bottom line in the MM I Disp lay) => page 24 . .,_
____________________________________________ S
....::..
p_e_e_c_ h_d
_ ia_l_o...:
g::;.._
s...:
y;...
s_t_e_m
___ ffll
[i] Tips [i] Tips
• If you have switched off the Repeat command => page 762func - You can assign a name tag for each of fifteen radio stations, fifteen
tion unde r Speech dialog system in the Set up submenu Settings , CDs and fo rty directory cards . •
the speech command for swi t ching main functions is not repeated.
• The speech dialog system also recognizes and accepts a switch Ap plies to veh icles: w ith mu lti-funct ion steeri ng w heel and speech di alog system
in the main function by pressing the appropriate function button on
Storing name tags
the MMI Terminal=> page 15. •
Name tags can be freely assigned for radio stations, CDs
App lies to vehi cles: with mult i-fu ncti on steering whee l and speech di alog system and directory cards.
Name tags - Select the main function in which you want to assign a
Radio, CD or directory can be operated through assigned name tag ::::>page 168.
name tags. Select the radio station or the CD, or open the directory
You can assign name tags for the main functions Radio , CD and card for which you want to assign a name tag .
direc t ory => page 169. The assigned name tags are stored in the ], the chime <Beep> sounds.
Press the Talk Button(¢ :<,
speech dialog system.
- Say STORESTATIONto assign a name tag for the rad io
When a list of assigned name tags is read out , you can select a name
tag dur ing the announcement from th e sp eech dialog syst em by station you want to play, or
<J briefly. The speech dialog system stops
pressing the Talk Button [ <Xl Say STORE CD to assign a name tag for the CD you have
reading the name tags and waits for a command . Diff erent inserted, or
commands are used for the individual main functions.
- Say STORE NAME to assign a name tag for the directory
Name tags can be assigned for the following card you have opened .
functions:
• Name tags can be assigned for radio stations in the main func - Say the name tag which you would like to assign for the
tion radio => page 170. radio station you have set, the CD or the directory card
• Name tags can be assigned for CDs in the main function CD you have opened.
=> page 171. - Repeat the name tag after the speech dialog system
• Name tags can be assigned for filed directory cards in the main requests you to.
function directory (NAME)=> page 171.
You can store freely selectable name tags in the speech dialog
system independently of the names shown in the MMI Display.
These name tags stored in the speech dialog system do not change ~

·-.,,- .. CAR,SETUP
• ....__S
....:..
p_e_e_c
_ h_d_ia
_ lo....;::
g'---
s-'-
y_s_t_e_m
_____________________________________________ _

the radio station or CD names shown in the display, nor do they If no name tags have been assigned, you hear a message
chang e your stored data in the direc t ory. confirming this .
The assigned name tags are stored in the speech dialog system. You While the assigned name tags for radio stations => page 170, CDs
can assign and open these name t ags in the speech dialog system => page 171 or directory cards=> page 171 are being read, you can
=> page 170 and delete them => page 172. You have various select and go to the name tag being read by briefly pressing the Talk
commands available for the assigned name tags in the individual Button . •
main functions => page 169.
You can assign a name tag for each of fifteen radio stations, fifteen Ap plies to ve hicles: w it h m ult i-fu nction steer ing w heel and speech di alog syst em
CDs and forty dir ectory cards . Selecting radio stations using name tags

[i] Tips Whenever the name tags of the radio stations are being read, you
• You can also listen to assigned nam e tags f or directory cards, can select a name tag during the announcement from the speech
when you select the MMI function Play name tag in the directory dialog system by briefly pressing the Talk Button [¢'.ccj
. The speech
card . In addition, you can dele t e the name t ag assigned for t he dialog system stops reading the name tags and waits for a
directory card you opened, using the MMI function Delete name tag command .
=> page 88. The data stored on the directory card are not changed. You can say the following commands:
• Using the Speech dialog system function in the Setup submenu
Settings , you have the option of deleting all assigned name tags Command Description
=> page 162. • PLAY The radio station for the selected name tag
is played.
Appli es to vehi cles: w it h mu lti -fu nct io n steering w heel and speec h di al og syste m DELETE The selected name tag is deleted.
Reading name tags RENAME The selected name tag can be renamed.
The recorded "name tags" can be read aloud by the
If you have selected the name tag of the radio station and you do not
system.
say a command, the radio station (which is assigned to this name
- Select the main function (radio, CD or directory) from tag) is automatically tuned in. For example, if you have assigned the
which you want the assigned voice entries to be read name tag "Favorite station" for the radio station "WAMK" and you
~ page 168.
briefly press the Talk Button during the announcement "Favorite
station", this radio station is tuned in after a short period of time.
- Briefly press the Talk Button [¢'.<
c).The chime <Beep>
sounds.
[i] Tips
- Say READ LIST to have the assigned name tags for the You can assign a name tag for each of fifteen radio stations. •
selected main function read.
----------------=----------=___,,:____- Sp ee ch dialog s y stem Ill
App lies to vehicle s: wit h m ult i-func ti on steer ing wheel and speec h di alog system system by briefly pressing the Talk Button 1¢'.c•
]. The speech dialog
Selecting CDs using name tags system stops reading the name tags and waits for a command .

C omm a nds for u s ing the main fun c tion dire c t o ry :

Whenever the name tags for the CDs are being read, you can select
a name tag during the announcement from t he speech dialog Command Des c ription
system by briefly pressing the Talk Button! ¢'.!•
]. The speech dialog
system st ops reading the name tags and waits for a co m mand. CALL One of the t elephone num bers fi led on the
directory card of the selected name tag can
Comm a nds for using th e m a in function CD: be called.
NAVIGATE TO* Yo u can naviga t e to a naviga t ion destina-
Comm a nd D e scription
tion filed on the directory card of the
PLAY The CD of the selected name tag is p layed. sel ecte d name tag .
DELETE The selected name tag is deleted. DELETE The selected name tag is deleted.
RENAME The selected name t ag can be renamed . RENAME The selected name tag can be renamed.

If you have selected the name tag of a CD and you do not say a
com m and, the CD (which is assig ned to th is name tag) is p layed
automatical ly. For example, if you assign the name tag "Entertain -
ment" for a CD and you briefly press the Talk Button dur ing the
announcement "Entertainment", this CD is played after a short
period of t ime.
[i ] Tips
You can assig n a na m e tag for each of fifteen CDs. •
App lies to vehicles: wit h mu lt i-fu ncti on steer ing wheel and speech di alo g system
Selecting directory cards using
A telep hone n umbe r filed on the directory car d or a filed
navig at ion destinati on can be selected using the name
tag assigned for the directory card.
Whenever the name tags of the directory cards are read, you can
select a name tag during the announcement from the speec h d ialog
If you have se lected the name tag of a directory card and you do not
say a command, the system -guided help function assists you
=>page 173 in using the commands .
If you have more than one telephone number on fi le on the direc t ory
card , you can specify the des ired telep hone number after saying the
name tag with "at the office landline", "at the office mobil e", "at
ho me land line" or "at home mo bi le", f or example, CALL PETER
BATES AT HOME MOBILE . If you do not give details (or give incom -
plete details) about the te lephone num ber, the speech dialog
system will ask you which te lephone number (office land line , office
mobi le, home landline, home m obile) should be dialed .
If you have filed one navigation dest inat ion* on the directory card ,
name tags this destination is imported into the entry for destination. If you
have f il ed two navigation desti nat ions*, you can specify t he desired
navigation destination after saying the name tag with "to the office
address" or "to the private address", f or examp le, NAVIGATE TO
PETER BATES TO THE PRIVATE ADDRESS . If you do not indicate the
type of navigati o n desti natio n, t he speed d ialo g syst em will ask you
which address (business or private) should be used. .,

·-.,,- .. CAR,SETUP
 _______,___---=----:....- ____________
Sp eec h di a log system _
-
Ap plies to vehi cles: w ith m ult i-fu nction steer ing whee l and speech d ialog system
[i ] Tips Entering numbers
You can assign a name tag for each of forty directory cards. •
Numbers can be spoken individually or in groups.

Applies to vehi cles: w it h mu lt i-fu nctio n steer ing w heel and spee ch d ialog system - Select the ma in function, e.g. TELEPHONE * => page 168.
Deleting name tags - Briefly press the Talk Button [¢'.<<
], the chime <Beep>
sounds.
- Select t he main function (radi o, CD or dir ectory) from
which yo u want the assig ned name tags to be read - Say the command, for example, DIAL NUMBER .
=> page 168. - Say individual numbers or a group of nu mbers. The
- Br iefly press t he Talk Button[ ¢'.<
<], t he chime <Beep> system repeats in each case t he num bers spoken individ-
so un ds . uall y or t he group of numbers spoken .

- Say READ LIST to have the assigned name tags for the
selected ma in function read .
- Press the Talk Button[ ¢'.<<]
while t he name tag to be
de leted is being read .
- Say DELETE to de lete the selected name tag.
- Confi rm t he enqui ry f rom the speec h dialog system with
YES to de lete t he entry .
A name tag is in a separate memory and can on ly be used over the
speech dia log system. In t his way, all the data filed in the MMI
remain untouc hed if you delete a selected name tag.
However, if you delete a directory card (directory entry) in the MMI
~ page 85, the matching name tag is automatica lly deleted .
Using the Speech dialo g system function in t he Setup submenu
Settings, you have th e option of deleting all assigned name tags
~ page 162. •
- Say additiona l numbers or add it iona l gro ups of numbers
if needed . The system repe at s in each case the nu mbers
spoken ind ividually or the grou p of numbers spoken, or
- Say DELETEto delete the numbe r spoken previously or
the group of nu mbers sp o ken prev iously, or
- Say DIAL to end entry of numbers . The number is dialed.
For radio frequencies which include a number following th e decimal
point, the decima l point must also be given . For radio frequenc ies
with a number after the decima l point, e.g. for 89.5, say eighty nin e
point five .
Tip s f o r Ent e ring Numb e rs
When entering phone numbers, t he nu m bers zero to nine are recog-
nized. Enter the telephone numbers as a sequence of dig its (sepa -
rated by short pauses) or by numbers spoken individually. Say
phone numbers just as you would if you were tel ling a person a
phone number .
After each sequence of numbers (separated by a short pause in
speech), the numbers recognized are repeated by the system . The .,_
 Speech dialog system -
----------------'--------=----'-----
system does not recognize combinations of numbers (for example, You can request special help using the following help
twenty three), only digits spoken individually (two, three ). • commands:

Help Description
Dialog-guided help functions commands
HELP Possible commands are read out depending on
Applies to vehic le s: with multi-function steering wheel and speech dia log system the main function opened :::::,page 174.
Summary of help functions HELP MMI Possible commands for using the speech dialog
There are two separate types of help for the speech dialog system are read out :::::,page 175.
system. HELP RADIO Possible commands for using the main radio
function are read out :::::,page 175.
If no suitable command is recognized after the speech dialog
system is activated, the system offers assistance with a help text for HELP CD Possible commands for using the main CD func -
the particular dialog step. You can also specifica lly request special tion are read out:::::, page 176.
help with help commands. HELP DIREC- Possible commands for using the main directory
TORY function are read out:::::>page 177.
The system will provide the following assistance if you
do not say a command: HELP TELE- Possible commands for using the main tele -
PHONE* phone function are read out :::::,page 178.
Help System Description HELP NAVIGA- Possible commands for using the main naviga-
System-guided
help
Depending on the situation, possible com-
mands are read out automatica lly by the speech
TION* tion function are read out :::::,page 178. •
dialog system :::::,page 173. App lies to vehic les: with mu lti-function steering wheel and speech dialog system
Help in the MMI Possible commands are shown in addition in System-guided help
Display the MMI Display :::::,page 174.
If there is no voice command :::::,page 166 from the user after the
speech dialog system is activated, or if the command is not recog-
nized, the speech dialog system asks <Pardon?> and waits for a
command. If there is no command from the user a second time, the
speech dialog system offers a selection of voice commands for the
current situation. If there is still no command issued, the system
terminates the dialog with <Cancel>.
At almost any time in a dialog, you can open a help text or possible
commands for the current function using the HELP command
=> page 173. ~

·-.,,- .. CAR.SETUP
• ....__S--'p
'---
e_e_c_h_ d_i_a_l_
o-==
ga,.._
s...,
y_s_t_e_m
___________________________________________ _

Dialog -guided example of system -guided help {main App lies to veh icles : with mult i-fu ncti on steering whee l and speech di alog system
function telephone* activated): Help in the MMI Display

Operation / Message Help texts ore shown in the MM/ Display.

command speech dialog system a>
Briefly press
Chime: <Beep>
Talk Button [<(t,
]
No command
<Pardon?>
giv en
<Important commands for the telephone are:>

<Enter PIN number> bl

No command Fig. 198 Speech dialog
<Dial number> system: SOS Help MMI
given
<Redial>
- Briefly press the Talk Button[ ¢;<<].
The chime <Beep>
<Call>
sounds.
al The messages are shown abbreviated and in logica l order.
bl The command ENTERPIN NUMBER is available if your vehicle is equipped - Say the command HELP MMI , for example ~ page 175.
with a GSM cell phone. Important help commands are shown in the MMI Display
~ fig. 198 . •
[i ]Tips
App lies to veh icles: w ith mult i-function steering whee l and speech dia log system
At almost any time in the dialog, you can say the command HELP, in
order to request help. Ther eby you will hear an announcement of "Help " command
the commands possible at the moment. •
The HELP command con be said in all main functions.
At almost any time in a dialog, you can open a help text or possible
commands for the current situation using the HELP command .
After the end of the message for the help function, the speech
dialog system continues to be active fo r a short time . This allows
you to say a command without pressing the Talk Button again [ ¢'.l<].•
 Speech dialog system -
----------------'--------=----'-----
App lies to vehicle s: with mult i-fu ncti on steer ing w heel and speec h di alog system
Operation/ Message
"Help MMI" command command speech dialog systema>
List possible commands for using the speech dialog <Briefly pressing the Talk Button on the steer-
system. ing wheel activates the speech dialog system
or selects an entry in a list .>
- Briefly press the Talk Button[ ¢(<<
].
<Pressing the Talk Button longer cancels a run-
- After the chime <Beep>, say HELP MMI. The speech ning dialog .>
HELP MMI
dialog system then gives general pointers on operation
<You can say CANCEL or HELP at any time.>
and lists possible Help functions (e.g. Help Telephone,
Help Radio, Help CD) and all the available ma in functions <for information about a specific device, say,
for example, HELP RADIO, HELP CD and so on.>
(devices).
- After the system has read out the commands briefly
<Possible devices are: (Device List)>
•
press the Talk Button[ ¢(<<]
to say one of the possible a) Th e messages are shown ab b reviated an d in l o g ical orde r.
commands.
Ap plies to v ehicles: w ith m ulti -funct ion stee rin g w heel and s peech d ialog system
- To stop the dialog or the announcement before it is
finished , press the Talk Button [<i:<c]
again and hold it down "Help Radio" command
until you hear the message <Cancel>. List possible commands for using the radio.
Possible commands in Help MMI: - Briefly press the Talk Button[ ¢(<<], the chime <Beep>
sounds.
Operation/ Message
command speech dialog systema> - Say the command HELP RADIO. The speech dialog
Briefly press
system starts listing possible voice commands for using
Chim e: <Beep> the rad io.
Talk But ton [~<
1]

- After the system has read out the commands briefly

press the Talk Button[ ¢(<<]
to say one of the possible
commands .
- To stop the dialog or the announcement before it is
finished , press the Talk Button [ ¢(c,]
again and hold it down
until you hear the message <Cancel>. ~

·-.,,- .. CAR.SETUP
• ....__S
....:..
p_e_e_c
_ h_d_ia
_ lo....;::
g'---
s-'-
y_s_t_e_m
_____________________________________________ _

Possible commands in Help Radio: App li es to vehic les: with multi-funct ion steer ing whee l and speech dia log system

"Help CD" command

Operation/ Message
command speech dialog systema> List possible commands for using the CD player.
Briefly press Talk - Briefly press the Talk Button[¢'.<•],the chime <Beep>
Button 1¢'.<•I Chime: <Beep> sounds.
- Say the command HELP CD . The speech dialog system
<Important commands for the radio are:> starts listing possible voice commands fo r using the CD
<FM> player.
<AM> - After the system has read out the commands briefly
<SDARS> press the Talk Button[ ¢'.<•]
to say one of the possible
commands .
<Next station>
<Previous station> - To stop the dialog or the announcement before it is
finished, press the Talk Button [¢'.<•]
again and hold it down
<The specific frequency, for example 94 .7
until you hear the message <Cancel>.
HELP RADIO Megahertz in FM or 550 Kilohertz in AM.>
<Store station> The installed CD player device, e.g. CD changer* is generally
described as the CD player.
<Play station lnamel>b>
<After the command "Read list" you can select Possible commands in Help CD:
a station name with the Talk Button and:>
Operation/ Message
<Play> command speech dialog systema>
<Rename> Briefly press Talk
<Delete>
• Button(¢'.<<] Chime: <Beep>
al The messages are shown abbreviated and in logica l order.
bl For "(name)", say the name tag you assigned.
____________________________________________ S
....::..
p_e_e_c_ h_d
_ ia_l_o...:
g::;.._
s...:
y;...
s_t_e_m
___ !II
Ap plies to vehic les: with mu lti-funct ion steering wh eel and speech dia log system
Operation/ Message
command
" Help Directory " command
speech dialog systema)
<Important commands for the CD player are:> List possible commands for using the directory_
<CD (one to twelve*)> Briefly press the Talk Button [¢'.<c],
the chime <Beep>
<Track number (one to ninety nine)> sounds.
<Next CD> Say the command HELP DIRECTORY.The speech dialog
<Previous CD>
system starts listing the possible voice commands for
using the directory.
<Next track>
- After the system has read out the commands briefly
<Previous track>
HELP CD press the Talk Button [¢'.<
c)to say one of the possible
<Store CD> commands.
<Play CD (namel>b ) - To stop the dialog or the announcement before it is
<After the command "Read list " you can select finished, press the Talk Button [ ¢'.c,
Jagain and hold it down
a CD name with the Talk Button and:> until you hear the message <Cancel>.
<Play>
Possible commands in the Help Directory :
<Rename>
Operation/ Message
<Delete>
command speech dialog systema>
al The messages are shown abbreviated and in logical order.
bl For "(name)", say the name tag you assigned . Briefly press
Chime : <Beep>
Talk Button [~c,
]
If there are two * CD changers in the vehicle , up to twelve CDs can be
selected.

[i] Tips
The speech dialog system permanently stores an assigned CD
name. If you remove the CD from the drive and insert it again later
into some other slot in the CD changer*, the CD can be selected
from the previously assigned name tag . •

·-.,,- .. CAR,SETUP
• ....__S....:..
p_e_e_c_ h_d_ia_ lo....;::
g'---s -'-
y_s_t_e_m
_____________________________________________ _

Message
- To stop the dialog or the announcement before it is
Operation/
command speech dialog systema>
finished, press the Talk Button [¢(<<]
again and hold it down
until you hear the message <Cancel>.
<Important commands for the directory are:>
Possible commands in Help Telephone:
<Call (namel>bl

<Navigate to (namel>bl Operation/ Message

command speech dialog systema>
<Rename (namel>bl
Briefly press Talk
<Store name>bl Button [¢'.c,J Chime: <Beep>
HELP DIRECTORY
<After the command "Read list" you can also
select a name with the Talk Button and:> <Important commands for the telephone are:>
<Navigate to>
<Enter PIN number>b l
<Call>
<Dial number>
<Rename>
HELP TELEPHONE <Redial>
<Delete>
• <Call (namel>cl
al The messages are shown abbreviated and in log ical order.
b l For "(name)", say the name tag you ass ign ed. <Call (name) at home>cl

Appl ies to vehicles: with mu lti-funct ion steer ing wheel, speech di alog system and cell p hone
<Call (name) at the office>cl
•
package
al The messages are shown abbreviated and in log ical order.
bl The command ENTERPIN NUMBERis available if your vehicle is equipped
"Help Telephone" command wi t h a GSM cell phone .
cl For "(name)", say the name tag you assigned.
List possible commands for using the telephone.
- Briefly press the Talk Button[ ¢(<<],
the chime <Beep> Ap pli es to veh icles: with mult i-function steering whee l, speech di alo g system and
sounds. Navigation system

"Help Navigation" command

- Say the command HELP TELEPHONE. The speech dialog
system starts listing possible voice commands for using List possible commands for using the Navigation system .
the telephone.
- Briefly press the Talk Button[ ¢(<<],
the chime <Beep>
- After the system has read out the commands briefly sounds.
press the Talk Button [¢(<<]
to say one of the possible
commands .
____________________________________________ S
....::..
p_e_e_c_ h_d
_ ia_l_o...:
g::;.._
s...:
y;...
s_t_e_m
___ ffll
- Say t he comm an d HELP NAVIGATION. The spee ch d ialog Message
Operation/
syst em st arts listin g possib le vo ice com mand s for navi- command speech dialog systema >
gat ion.
<Possible map options are:>
- Afte r t he syst em has read o ut th e commands briefly
<Map on>
press t he Talk Butt on [<:i:c,
] t o say one of t he possible
comm an d s. <Map off>
<Intersection zoom on>
- To stop the d ial og or the announcement before it is
fini shed, pre ss the Talk Butt on [<:i:c,]
again and ho ld it down <Intersection zoom off>
until you hear the mes sage <Cancel>. <Overview map>
YES <Detail map>
Possible commands in Help Navigation:
<Destination map>
Operation/ Message
<Current position map>
command speech dialog systema >
<Scale 100, 200 , or 500 yards , 1,2,5 miles and
Br iefly p res s
Chime : <Beep> so on up to 400 miles> cl
Talk Button [¢;<
,]
<Zoom in>
<Important commands for the Navigation sys-
tem are:> <Zoom out>

<Navigate to (namel> bl al The mess ages are shown abb reviat ed and in log ical order.
bl For "( na me)", say the name tag you assi gne d .
<Start route guidance> cl Depend ing on th e scale th at was set, "m ile s" or " km" are read out fo r th e
<Cancel route guidance> scale of the ma p.
HELP NAVIGA-
TION <Special destinations>
Yo u ca n he ar th e last voic e me ssage f or navigati o n w ith the
<Last destinations> com mand LAST INSTRUCTION .

<Top destinations> Usin g th e co mm and s OVERVIEW MAP, DESTINATION MAP o r

CURRENT POSITION MAP , you can set th e ind ividual typ es of map
<Last instruction>
~ p age 150.
<Would you like help for the map options?>
The co mm and DETAIL MAP is o nly ava il able t h ro ug h th e spe ech
dialog sy st em . After you have spoken the command, yo ur current
veh icl e posi ti o n is sho wn on a sca le of 0.6 mi (1 km). This allo ws you
to obtain a quick ove rview of your current vehicle pos it ion . ~

·-.,,- .. CAR,SETUP
• ....__S
....:..
p_e_e_c
_ h_d_ia
_ lo....;::
g'---
s-'-
y_s_t_e_m
_____________________________________________ _

If you wou ld like to br ing up the previous ly set map d isplay aga in,
O p e rati o n / M e ssage
say the appropr iat e command, e.g . CURRENT POSITION MAP . The
command sp eec h di a log sy st e m a)
system remembers the scale previously set and d isplays it aga in. •
56 <56 - please continue .>
789 <789 - please continue .>
Examples of the speech dialog
DIAL <The number is being dialed .>
system
al The messages are show n abb reviated and in logic al ord er.
Applies to vehi cles: w it h mu lt i-fu nctio n steer ing w heel and spee ch d ialog system bl If the te lephone fun ct ion is already act ive, this com mand is not necessary.

General information
The desired telep hone number can be entered in connected groups .
These examples of di alogs illustrate how the speech Say the numera ls in a fluent sequence .
dialog system works. The spoken numerals are confirmed and displayed. If you make a
m istake, say the command DELETE, then the group of numera ls last
If you are unc ertain during a dia log , you can say HELP at almost any
time and you will be given a he lp text for the cu rrent dialog step . spoken is deleted .

The most impo rtant dialogs are shown as il lust rations in the Ti ps fo r Ent e ring Numb e rs
following examples . The rest of the dialogs proceed in a similar When entering phone numbers, the numbers zero to nine are recog -
way . • nized. Ente r the telephone numbers as a sequence of dig its (sepa -
rated by short pauses) or by numbers spoken individually. Say
phone nu m bers just as you would if you were tel ling a person a
Applie s to veh icles: w ith mu lt i-fun c tion steering wh eel, s peech d ialog system and cell p ho ne
package phone number.
Dial number Af t er eac h seque n ce of numbers (separated by a short pause in
speech) , the numbers recogni zed are repeated by the system . The
Di a lo g example : Dial numb e r system does not recognize combinations of numbers (for examp le,
twenty t hree), on ly digi t s spoken individually (t wo, thre e). •
O p e ration / M essa g e
c omm a nd sp ee ch dialog sy st e m a)
Briefly press
Chime: <Beep>
Talk Button [¢le]
TELEPHONE <Telephone>bl
DIAL NUMBER <The number, please .>
01234 <01234 - plea se continu e.>
______________________________________________ S--'p
'---
e_e_c_h
_ d
_ ia_lo--'g
=-s_y
"--s_t_
e_m
__ ffll
Appl ies to vehicles: w ith mu lti-funct ion steer ing wheel and speech d ialog system App lies to veh icles: w ith mu lti-funct ion steer ing whee l and speech d ialog system

Assigning name tags in the directory Using name tags to make a phone call

Dialog example: Assigning a name tag for the e x isting Dialog example : Using the name tag "Peter Bates " to
MMI directory entry for Mr. Bates make a phone call*

Operation / Message Operation / Message

command speech dialog systema l command speech dialog systemal
Bri efl y pr ess Br iefly pr ess
Ch ime: <Beep> Chime: <Beep>
Talk Button [¢:C c] Talk Button [¢:Cc
]
STORE NAME <The name, please .> DIRECTORY or <Directory> or
PETER BATES <Repeat the name , please .> TELEPHONEbl <Telephone>

PETER BATES <The name Peter Bates has been stored .> CALL PETER
BATES AT HOME <Would you like to call Peter Bates?>
al The messages are shown abbrevia t ed and in log ical order. MOBILE

The directory (NAM E function) must be se lected in the M M I and the
directory card to be nam ed mus t be opened~ page 83, so tha t you
can assign a name tag for the corresponding directory card.
The na me tag is a fr eely selec t ab le desig nat ion, for exam p le,
"sports cl ub" or "wor k location" .
Th e na m e t ag m ust be rep eate d w ith th e sam e emph asi s and at th e
same volume . Assign lon ger designat ions for the name ta g s, for
examp le, "sports club". This m akes it easier for the speech dia log
system to recogn ize. If you use first and last names for the name
tags, do not make excessive pauses when speaking them .
Nam e t ags ar e use r-de pende nt and are best recog niz ed w ith the
use r who previous ly assi g ned th em . •
<The number for Peter Bates at home mobile is
YES
being dialed.>
al The messages are shown abbrev iated and in log ical order.
bl If on e of t hese two f unc t ions is already act ive, t his command is no t nec es-
sary.
If you answered with YES, t he t elep hone numb er on fil e is picke d
fro m t he d ir ector y card of t he select ed nam e tag "Pet er Bat es" .
If yo u have m or e tha n one t ele phon e n umber o n fil e o n the d ir ecto ry
card, you can specify the desired telep hone number after saying the
nam e ta g w ith "at the offic e landlin e" , "a t th e off ice mobi le", "a t
home land line" or "at home mob ile" . If you do not give details (or
g ive in comp lete deta il s) about th e t eleph o ne numb er, th e spee ch
dialo g system will ask you w h ich te lephon e number (off ice landline,
off ice mob ile, ho me landl ine, hom e m obi le) sh ould be di aled. •

·-.,,- .. CAR.SETUP
• ....__S
....:..
p_e_e_c
_ h_d_ia
_ lo....;::
g'---
s-'-
y_s_t_e_m
_____________________________________________ _

Appl ies to vehi cl es: w ith mu lt i-funct ion steer ing wheel , speech d ialog system and App li es to veh icles: w ith mu lt i-funct ion steer ing whee l and speech di alog system
Naviga tion system
Renaming a name tag in the directory
Using name tags for navigation
Dialog example : Renaming the name tag "Peter Bates "
Dialog example: Using the name tag " Peter Bates " for
navigation* Operation/ Message
command speech dialog systema >
Operation/ Message
command speech dialog systema> Briefly pres s
Chime : <Beep>
Talk Button [¢'.(
<]
Briefl y pre ss
Chi me: <Beep>
Talk Button [~,:c
,) DIRECTORYbl <Directory>

DIRECTORY or <Directory> o r <The following names are stored :>

NAVIGATION bl <Navigation> <Audi> ,
READ LIST
<David Williams> ,
NAVIGATE TO <Peter Bates>
PETER BATES TO <Would you like to navigate to the indicated
THE PRIVATE destination?> Briefl y press Talk But-
ADDRESS_ to n [¢'.<
<I

YES RENAME <The name, please .>

al The messages are shown abbreviated and in log ical order. NEIGHBOR PETER <Repeat the name , please.>
bl If one of theses t wo func t ions is already act ive, th is command is not neces -
<The name Neighbor Peter has been
sary. NEIGHBOR PETER
stored .>
If you said YES, th e navi gation desti nation is entered, and naviga - al The mess ages are shown abbrev iated and in log ical order.
t io n calcu lat es th e route => page 120. bl If t he d irecto ry funct ion is already act ive, t his command is not necessa ry.

If yo u have file d a navigatio n d est inat io n on t he d ir ectory card , this

By b riefl y pr essing t he Talk butto n du ri ng th e nam e t ag annou nce-
dest inat ion is shown in the MMI Display after the command NAVI -
ment, the name tag just said can be selected . The announcement
GATE TO PETER BATES.
st ops. The speec h d ialog system wait s f or a comm and . If th e
If you have fi led two navigation addresses* on t he d irectory card, RENAME command is said, you can enter a new nam e as a name
yo u can sp ecify t he d esi red navigat ion destina t io n afte r saying th e t ag.
nam e tag w it h "t o t he off ice address" or "to the pr ivate add ress" . If
It is only changed in t he recorded name tag . The add ress card in the
yo u d o not ind icat e the t ype of navigati o n dest inat io n, th e speed
MMI remains unchanged. •
dia log sy ste m w ill ask y ou which address (b usiness or private )
sho uld be used . •
____________________________________________ S
....::..
p_e_e_c_ h_d
_ ia_l_o...:
g::;.._
s...:
y;...
s_t_e_m
___ ffll
Appl ies to vehicles: with mult i-funct ion steering wheel and speech dia log system App lies to veh icles: w ith mu lti-funct ion stee ri ng wheel, speech dia log system and
Navigat ion system
Deleting entries in the directory
Selecting navigation destination
Dialog e x ample : Deleting the name tag Peter Bates
Dialog example : Select special destination
Operation / Message
Operation / Message
command speech dialog systema >
command speech dialog systema >
Brief ly press
Chi me: <Beep> Briefly press
Talk Button [¢le] Chi me: <Beep>
Talk Button [¢le]
DIRECTORYbl <Directory>
NAVIGATION <Navigation> bl
<The following names are stored:>
<Audi>, SPECIAL DESTI-
READ LIST <Your special destination , please?>
<David Williams >, NATION
<Peter Bates> List of gas stat ions is show n i n t he MMI Dis-
NEXT GAS STA-
Br iefl y pres s Talk play . <Please select a special destination from
TION
the following list .>
Button [¢'.<<I
Examp le <Would you like to navigate to the indicated
<Would you like to delete the name Peter
DELETE NUMBER THREE destination?>
Bates?>
YES
YES <The name has been deleted .>
al The mess ages are shown abbrev iat ed and in log ical order.
al The messages are shown abbreviated and in log ical order.
bl If the navigat ion f unc t ion is al ready act ive, t his com mand is not necessary.
bl If the d irectory funct ion is already act ive, t his command is not necessary.

The search f o r the location in the dat a base can t ake a few seco nd s.
As soon as the desired name tag is read, press the Talk Button
Then a list of potential destinations is shown in the MMI Disp lay.
brie fl y. The message stops . The speech dialog syst em wa it s for a
Select th e d esi red loca tion by g iv ing th e entr y num ber. Say th e
command. If you say the command DELETE, the last name tag read
command NEXT PAGEor PREVIOUS PAGEor TOP OF LIST to display
is delet ed.
th e list.
Only the recorded name tag is deleted. The directory card in MM I
rema ins u nchanged . •
[i ] Tips
Select ing a navigation dest inat io n using TOP DESTINATION or LAST
DESTINATION is done in similar way to t he examp le SPECIAL
DESTINATION. •

·-.,,- .. CAR.SETUP
• ....__S
....:..
p_e_e_c
_ h_d_ia
_ lo....;::
g'---
s-'-
y_s_t_e_m
_____________________________________________ _

Applies to vehi cl es: w ith mu lti-fu nct ion steer ing w heel and spee ch d ial og system

Setup for the speech dialog system

Using the Speech dialog system function in the Setup submenu
Settings, you can switch off command repetition when switching
sources (switch main function) or delete all name tags
~ page 162. •
______________________________________________ S--'p
'---
e_e_c_h
_ d
_ ia_lo--'g
=- s_y
"--s_t _
e_m
__ llff

·-.,,- .. CAR.SETUP
Alphabetical index
• Alphab e tical

A
ind ex

Auto. call answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Car

Auto . red ia I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Function button . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 158
Activate your Sate lli te Radio Service .. . . 57 Automatic seek mode Car - General veh icle settings
Adaptive Cruise Control . .. .. .. . .. .. .. 158 FM/AM rad io . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Genera l safety precautions . .. .. .. . 158
Adhesive labels . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ........ 33 Automatic station scan - SCAN Category filter (Satellite Radio) . .. .. .... 61
Altitude disp lay ..................... 152 FM/AM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 CD
Arrow buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Sate lli te Radio .................... 59 CD changer . ...................... 30
Asterisk Introduction .............. .. .. .. . . 63
What does it mean when someth ing is B Loading your CDs into the CD changer 31
marked with an asterisk? . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Name tags .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 169
Audi braking guard .. . .. .. .. .. ...... 158 Background lighting .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. 158 CD_ CD control ...................... 67
Audi mus ic interface Band .......... · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · 47 CD - CD list
Connect the adapter cab le .. .. . ... . . 36 Battery level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 CD se lection . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .... 66
Connect your portable player through the Bluetooth CD - General
3.5mm stereo jack adapter cable .. . 40 Connect cell phone .. . ... . ... . .. .. . 95 Display CD text .................... 70
Connecting USB storage medium .. . . 39 Brightness in the display ............. 164 Main menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. 66
Disconnect the adapter cable ....... 36 Repeating audio CD .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 69
Function button CD/AUX ...... .. .. . 64 C Selecting a track .......... .. .. . 66, 68
Input level .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ........ 76 Selecting Source .. . ... . ...... .. .. . 63
Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . . 35 Call Setup ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. 69
media compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Accept ...................... 101, 115 Sound ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. 77
Repeat . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ........ 75 Call mailbox . .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. . 104 CD and DVD drives
Use the iPod adapter cable to connect the Decline .. . .. .. .. . ... . ... . ... 101,115 CD changer . ...................... 30
iPod .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ........ 37 Dialacall .................... 99, 114 DVD drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Audi music interface - Control . . ....... 72 End ........................ 101,115 Information on CD operation . ... . ... 33
Audi music interface - General Mute on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
CD changer
Selecting Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 116
Ejecting CDs . .. .. .. .. .. . .......... 32
Selecting Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 Call options Genera l .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .......... 30
Audi parking system ... . ... . ... . ... . 158 Auto. call answer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Loading CDs . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 31
Audi side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Auto. red ia I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
CD contro l - CD . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . 67
Audio muting . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 14 Call options (Cell phone package)
CD control - MP3/WMA .. .. . ... . ... . .. . 67
Mute on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Audio source muting CD rings . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .... 33
Replacing a call .............. 102, 116
Telephone .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ...... . 101
 Alphabetical index l
CD setup Enteri ng a PIN .................... 98 Crossha irs
Disp lay CD te xt . .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. 70 Function button .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 96 Hor izonta l movement . . ... . ... . .. . 145
Repeat i ng au d io CD . .. . ... . .. .. .. .. 69 Inserting t he cell pho n e . .. .. .. . ... . 93 Vertica l move m ent . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 145
CD/AUX Ma in telepho ne me nu . .. . ... . .. .. .. 99
Function button .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 63 Removing the ce ll ph o ne .. .. .. . ... . 93 D
Cell phone Cell phone pac kage - Memory
Inserting ......................... 93 Call lists .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 103 Dat e f or m at .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. . 161
Removing .. ...... . ...... .. .. .. .. . 93 Call mailbox .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 104 Date setting .. . .......... .. .. .. .. .. . 161
Cell ph o ne cradle Dialed nu mb ers .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 104 Delete CD name .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . 67
Inse rt i ng the cell ph o ne . .. .. .. .. . .. 93 Dir ect ory . . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 105 Delete name tag ......... . ... . ...... . 88
Installa ti on and removal ... . .. ... .. . 92 Missed calls .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 107 Delete previous stations (FM) .. .. .. .. .. 56
Removing the ce ll phone .. . .. .. .. .. 93 Phone bo o k .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 105 Dele t e radio prese t s (FM/AM) .. .. .. .. .. . 56
Cell phone package ... . ...... .. .. .. .. . 91 Received cal ls .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . 106
Delete radio presets (Satel l ite Radio) .... 62
Call opt ions .. . ... . .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 109 Store in directory ...... . .......... 107
Destination input
Mailbox .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 110 Cent ra l loc king . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 158 City/street with special characters . .. 133
Memo ry settings . .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 110 Channel number (Satel lite Radio) . .. .. .. 59 Route plan ....................... 131
Cell phone package · Call functions Cleaning (CD/DVD) .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. . 33 Sing le destination ................ 129
Accepting a ca ll ... . ...... . ....... 101 Cockp it Dialog -g u ided help func ti ons . .. .. .. .. 173
Accepting cal ls . .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 115 MM I Components .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 9 Directory
Call mailbox .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . . 104 Compact Disc ... . ...... .. .. .. .. ...... 33 See Name (directory) .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. 82
Calli ng . .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . .. 99 Comp o nents i n t he co ckpi t . .. .. .. . ... . . 9 Disp lay
Declin ing a cal l . .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 101 connect your portab le player through the Switching off . . .............. .. ... 13
Declining ca lls . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 115 3.5m m stereo jac k adapter cable . .. 40 Switching on .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 13
Dialaca ll . .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 114 Con n ecti ng USB storage med i um . .. .. . . 39 Disp lay (inst r ument cluster)
End call .. .. .. . .............. . ... 101
Contro l buttons .. .. . .......... .. .. .. . 16 Accepting/declining calls .. .. .. .. .. 115
Ending a call ..................... 115
Cont rol knob .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . 16 Calling .......................... 114
Mute on/off .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 102
Contro l whee l ....................... 27 Dialed numbers .................. 114
Replacing a cal l . ... . ... . ... . . 102,116
CD .............................. 28 Di rectory ........................ 114
Cell pho ne package - Gene ral .. .. . .. 91, 96
Interface ..... .. .. .. ...... . ...... . 29 Endca ll ......................... 115
Bluetooth . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 95
Radio (FM/AM) . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 27 Missed calls . ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . 114
Contro ls . .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . .. 92
Rad io (Sat ellite Radio) . ... . .. ... . .. . 28 Navigat ion display .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 124
Crad le installation and removal .. . ... 92
Contro ls Phone book . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .... 114
Emergency calls ................... 98
Mu lti -function steering whee l . ... . .. 19 Received cal ls .................... 114

·-.,,- .. • •
• ....__A
---'lp
'--h_a_b
_ e_t_ic_a
_ l _in
_ d_e_x______________________________________________ _

Funct ion button

Replacing a ca ll .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 116
Selecting a CD t rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
E CAR . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . 158
Selecti ng frequency band .. . .. . . . .. 50 Edit CD/AUX . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ... .... . 63, 64
Select ing radio sta t ion . .. .. .. .. .. .. 50 Name (dire ctory) .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 84 FM/AM . .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 46
Selecti ng the iPod track lis t . . .. .. .. . 74 Emergency 911 . .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. 98 INFO . .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. . 154
Telephone status messages .. .. .. . 113 Ending a ca ll . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . . 115 NAME .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . . . . 82
Display sett ings Entering a PIN .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 98 Nav igation . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. 126
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 SETUP . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . 160
Entering numbe rs
Driver Inf o rma t ion Syst em TEL . . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .... 96
Using t he speech dialog system .. . . 172
See Display {ins t rument cluster) .. .. . 50 Funct io n b utt o ns
Ente r ing route pl an .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. 131
Drives Overv iew . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 15
Entering single destination ... . .. .. .. . 129
Audi music interface .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 35
Ext erior l ighting 158
CD changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . 30 G
DVD driv e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . 32
Informa t ion on car e .... .. .. .. .. .. . 33
F Gene ral inf o rmation . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 10
Inte rf ace . .. . ... . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. . 35 Gene ral safety precautions .. . ... . ... . . 10
Fact ory set t ings .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. 163
media compar tm ent . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 36 GPS - Global Positioning Syst em . .. .. . 122
FAQ .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. .. . 41, 42
Pause .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . . 14
Favor it e stations (FM) ... . ... . ... . .. . .. 55
Stopp ing ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . . 14
Forward/Revers e
H
DSP
in the CD title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Help function
DSP BOSE ... . ... . ... . ... . ........ 78
in the track Int erface .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 72 See Sp eech d ialog system - Help function
DSP BOSE
Frequency 173
Audio Pilot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Frequen cy bands {Rad io) .. . . . . . . .. . 47 History function . .. . ... . ... . ... . ... . . 18
Dynam ic driving sound compensa t ion 78
Manual setting {FM/AM) . .. . . . . .. ... 52 Home function .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. . 18
Sound set . .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 78
Saving stations (FM/ AM ) .. .. .. .. .. . 53
Surround level ... . ... . .. .. .. . ... . . 78
Saving stations (Satellite Radio) . . ... 58
DVD dr ive Selectivity of t he seek mod e {FM/AM ) 55
I
Eject in g a navigati o n DVD . .. .. .. .. . 33 Setti ng {Satellite Radio) ...... . ... . . 58 Im po rt
Gene ral . .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . . . . . . 32
Freq uency band (Radio ) . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 47 Cell phone entr ies .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 83
Loading the navigation DVD .. .. . . . . 33
Frequently Asked Questions {FAQ) Important Instructions . . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 10
Genera l .. . ... . .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. . . 41
Introduc t ion .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. . 41
Navigat ion system .......... . ... .. 42
 Alph a b e ti c al ind ex

Inf ormation (INFO)

Function button .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 154
M Me m ory settings
Memory used . . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 110
Introduction . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . 154 Mailbox Resort call lists .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 110
Main menu . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. . 154 Entering n umbers . .. . ... . .. .. . ... 110 Memory used .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . 110
Information on CD operation ........... 33 Main menu MM I
Input level .. .. .. . ... . ...... .. ...... . 76 CD ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. . ... . 66 Switching off . . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . 12
Instructio ns for care .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . . 11 Inf or m ation (INFO) . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 154 Switching on .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . . 12
Instrument cluster . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. . 158 Name (directory) . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . 83 MM I Disp lay
Radio . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . 48 Brightness .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 164
Int erface
Te lephone ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 99 Contro l wheel . . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . 27
Connect the adapter cable . . .. .. .. .. 36
Connect your portable player through the Manual - Interface .. . .......... .. .. .. . 72 Contro l wheel - CD . . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . 28
3.5mm stereo jack adapter cab le ... 40 Map Contro l wheel - Interface . .. . ... . .. .. 29
Connecting USB storage medium .. .. 39 See Navigation - Map 144 Contro l wheel - Radio (FM/AM) .. .. .. . 27
Disconnect the adapter cable .. .. .. . 36 Map view Contro l wheel - Radio (Satellite Radio) 28
Int roduction . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 35 Destination view . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. 150 Cursor and arrows .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 24
Use t he iPod adap t er cable to connect the Overv iew . .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . ... 150 Overview . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. . .. 23
iPod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Po sition . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . 150 Short description ......... .. . . .. .. . 23
Int erface - General Measurement units Speller .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. . .. 25
Selecting a track . .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. 74 Distance . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 162 Status bar .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . . 24
Selecting Tracks . .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. 72 Pressure .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. 162 Text high lighting . .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. 25
Setup ...... .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . ... . .. 74 Speed . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 162 MMI Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)
Int erface Setup Tem perature .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... 162 Genera l . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. . 41
Close .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . 74 med ia compartment .................. 36 Introduction . .. .. .. . ... . ... . ... . .. 41
Interface setup Memory Navigation system .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 42
Cur rent list . .. . ... . ... . .. .. ...... . 75 Nav1gat1on ...................... 137 MMI System
Input level .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 76 Memory (Cell ph o ne package) ... . .. .. . 103 Adjusting volume .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. 14
Repeat cu rren t track . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 75 Dialed numbers .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 104 Arrow buttons .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ..... 17
Dir ect ory . . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 105 Components in the cockpit . ... . ...... 9

L General information .. .. . .. .. .. .. . 103 Contro l buttons ...................

Contro l knob . .. .. .. .. .. ..
16
.. .. .. . .. 16
Missed calls .. . ... . ... . ... . .. .. .. 107
Labe ls .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . .. 33 Phone book ...................... 105 Function butto ns .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . 15
Laser devices .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . .. 33 Received cal ls .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. . 106 Genera l informatio n ... . .. .. .. .. .. . 1O
List display (MP3/WMA CD) ... . .. .. .. .. 71 Store current number . ... . .. .. .. .. 107 Hist ory f unct ion ... . ... . .. .. .. .. . .. 18

·-.,,- .. • •
Alphab e tical ind e x
Hom e func t ion .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 18
Instructio ns f or care . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 11
Mute f un cti on . . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 14
Notes on t raffic saf ety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Ret urn button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Switch ing off . .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . 13
Swi t ching on . .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 13
Term ina l .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 12
MM I Terminal
Ad ju st ing volume . .. .. . ... . .. . 14, 121
Arr ow b utto ns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Cont ro l but t ons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Contro l knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Func t ion bu t ton s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
History f unct ion .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 18
Return button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
MODE Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
MP3 set up
List disp lay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Repeat MP3/W MA CD .. . ... . .. .. .. . 70
MP3/WMA - CD con tr ol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
MP3/WMA Setup
Repeat Current Track . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 70
Multi -function st eering wheel
Calli ng . .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . .. .. 114
Contro ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Diale d nu mb ers . .. . . ... . .. .. .. .. . 114
Menu operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Missed cal ls . . . . .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 114
MODE Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Received cal ls . . .. . . ... . .. .. .. .. . 114
Repeating a voic e message . . . . . . . . . 22
right thu m bwhe el ... . ... . ... . . 22, 121
Speech d ialo g syste m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Ta lk Butt o n .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. 21
Vo lume adj ust m ent .. .. .. .. .. .. 22, 121
Mu lt i-func t ion steering wheel - Audio func -
t io n
CD track list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
iPod track list .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... 74
Rad io pr eset list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Mu lti -f unc t ion st eeri ng wheel - Calling fu nc-
tions
Contro ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
M ulti -f unction st eeri ng wheel - Teleph o ne
funct ion
Accept in g/declinin g calls . .. .. .. . .. 115
Calling . .. .. .. .. . . . . . .. .. .. .. . .. 114
End call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Replaci ng a call ... . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. 116
Mute fun ction .. . ... . .......... . ... . . 14
Mute on / off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
N Name tags .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. 169
Nam e (d irectory) . . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 82
Dele t e dir ect ory .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. 90
Dele t e nam e tag . . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. 88
Edit a naviga t ion d estination .. . ... . 139
Finding a nav igat ion destination in the
d irect o ry . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 138
Fun ctio n bu tt on . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 82
Impo rt . . .. .. .. .. .. . . . .. .. .. .. . ... 83
Import from cell p hone .. .. .. .. . ... 83
Loading a nav iga ti on d est inat io n from t he
d irect o ry . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 138
Ma in menu .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. 83
Name tags . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. 169
New entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . 83
Opti o ns .. . . . .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 88
Play name t ag . . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 88
Search di rect ory entry . .. .. . ... . .. . 83
Setup .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 89
Name (di rectory) - Edit
Change ent ry .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 85
Copy ent ry .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 85
Delete entries .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 85
Im po rt tele p hone num ber .. . . .. . .. . 86
M emory capac ity .. . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 86
Navigation dest i nation for a directory
ent ry ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 87
New entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
St ore d estinat io n . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 87
Name (di rectory) - Options
Calling a directory ent ry .. .. ... . ... . 88
Navigat ing t o a direc t ory en t ry . ... . . 89
NAME (naming CD) . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 67
Deleting . . .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . 172
Readi ng .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . 170
Selecti ng CDs usi ng name tags .. .. . 171
Selecting directo ry cards using name
tags .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. . 171
Select ing rad io st at ions us ing name tags
170
stori ng .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... 169
Naming CD .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 67
Naviga t ion
Destination info rmation .. . .. .. .. .. 154
Introduction .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 120
 Alph a b e ti c al ind ex

Navigation - General Position view .................... 150 Entering city/street w ith spec ial
DVD nav igation drive .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. 32 Scale .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... 145 characters . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 133
Eject ing a navigation DVD . . ... .. .. . 33 Side m enu . .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . .. 145 Entering route plan . ...... .. .. .. .. 131
Funct ion but t on .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 126 View .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. ..150 Entering single destination ... . ... . 129
Global Positioning System {GPSl . ... 122 Zoom . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 149 Finding a destination in the directory 138
How does the Navigation system work .. Zooming map . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... 145 Genera I ......................... 120
122 Nav igat ion - Me m ory Informat ion data . .. .. . ... . ... . ... 147
Loading navigat ion data ... . .. .. .. . 122 Previous des t inat ions . .. .. .. .. . ... 137 Interrupt route gu idance ... . ... .. .. 136
Loading the navigation DVD ... . ... . . 33 Top catego ries . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 137 Load from direc t ory . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 138
Navigat ion voice message volume .. 121 Navigation - Route .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... 141 Load route . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. . 140
Safety precautions . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 120 Avoid route ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... 143 Loading a desti nat ion . . ... . ... . .. . 138
Setup .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . . 147 Change route plan ................ 142 Main menu . .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 128
Street categories . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 125 Delete .......................... 140 Memory . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 137
Tips ..... .. ...... . ...... .. ....... 33 Load .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. . ... 140 Navigation DVD ...... . ........... 122
Voice messages .................. 151 Rout e cr iteria . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 143 Previous destinations .. .. . ... . 137, 152
Nav iga t io n - Map .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 144 Route Iist . . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... 142 Route criteria .................... 143
Additional informa t ion . ... . .. .. .. . 150 Specia l destinat io n s . .. .. .. . ... . .. 134 Route list ... . ... . ... . ... . ... . .... 142
Altitude disp lay .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 152 Store .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... 140 Route plan .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .... 141
Cont ent .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . . 150 Top destinations . .. ...... .. ...... 136 Route wit h stopover .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 131
Crosshairs .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . . 145 With stopover . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 141 Route without stopover . ... . ... .. .. 129
Destination disp lay ............... 145 Without stopover ................. 141 Saving destinations ............... 137
Destination information .. .. .. .. .. . 147 Special destinat ions . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 134
Navigati o n - Route gu idance . .. .. .. ... 123
Destination view .. . ...... .. .. .. .. 150 Avoid section of route .. .. .. .. .. .. . 143 Stopover . .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 141
Display . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . . 150 Store in directory . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. . 138
Change route gu idance .. . ... . .. .. . 136
Information display ............... 144 Country se lection . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... 129 Store rou t e . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. . 140
Intersection zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Street in a new city . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 132
Delete previous destinations ....... 152
Map disp lay .. . ... . ...... .. .. .. .. 144 Street in a previously selected city .. 133
Delete route ..... .. ...... .. .. . ... 140
Map scheme .. . ... . ...... .. .. . ... 148 Top categories .. ......... .. .. .. .. 137
Destination input . .. .. .. .. .. .. 129, 131
Nav-lnfo . .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 147 Top destinations .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. 136
Directory destinations ............. 138
No rt h/d irect io n of travel orientat ion 145, Visual presentation in the instrument
Display in the MM I .. . ... . ... . ... . . 124
149 clus t er d isplay . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 124
Edit a navigation destination . .. .. .. 139
Orientation ...................... 149 Vo ice guidance . .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 123
Edit d irectory . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ...... 139
Overview map 150 Voice m essages ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 151
Enter NAV start location ........... 153
Pos1t1on menu ................... 145
Enter ing a navigat ion dest inat io n 128

·-.,,- .. • •
-L-___;, A....:.:.!
lp.:..
:..:..:.
h a:.::
b:..e.:..
t:.:
i..:
c..:
a_l---
i_n---
d__
e.:..
x_______________________________________________ _

Navigation DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Previous stations (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Ejecting a navigation DVD . ... . ... . . 33
Loading the navigation DVD .. .. .. . . 33 R Calling up presetlist . .. .. .. .. .. .. ..
Navigation voice guidance .. .. .. . ... . . 22
Navigation voice message Radio - Genera l
Volume . .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. ..... 121 Band . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. 47
Category fi lte r (Satellite Radio) . .. . .. 61
Nav- lnfo . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 147
Delete previous stations (FM) . . . . . . . 56
Notes on traffic safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Delete radio presets (Satellite Radio) . 62
Favorite stations .................. 48
0 Function button . ... . ... . ... . .. .. .. 46
Main menu ....................... 48
ON/OFF knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Manual station selection (FM/AM) . .. 52
Operating Instructions
Name tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
How the book is organized .. .. .. .. . . 4
Presets . .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. . ... . . 51
Optional equipment
Previous stations (FM) ... . ... . .. .. . 55
Marked with an asterisk . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Saving stations .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. 51
Options
Selecting frequency band .. .. .. . ... 47
Name (directory) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Selecting station .. .. . ... . ... 48, 49, 50
Options (Cell phone package) Setup (FM/AM) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 54
Mute on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Setup (Satellite Radio) ... . ...... .. . 60
Replacing a call ... . ....... . .. 102, 116 Sorting stations (Sate llite Radio) ..... 60
Owner's Manual . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 1, 4 Sound .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. 77
Station disp lay (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
p Station info (Satellite Radio) . ... . ... 61
Station reception (FM/AM) . . . . . . . . . . 55
Pause function .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 14 Station selection (Satellite Radio) . . . . 58
Phone book System information (Satellite Radio) . 62
intheMMI .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . 105 Ticker text (FM) ................... 55
Phone ca ll Tuning !FM/AM) .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 52
See Call . .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 99 Tuning (Satellite Radio) .. . ... . ... .. 58
Play name tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Radio - Presetlist
Presets ............................. 51 in the instrument cluster display . .. . 50
Previous destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Radio - Stat ion lists
AM band ......................... 49
51
Delete previous stations (FM) . .. .... 56
Delete radio presets (FM/AM) . .. .. .. 56
Dynamic station list . .. .. .. .. .. . ... 48
FM band ... . .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 48
in the MMI ....................... 48
Last stations . .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . 48
Previous stations .................. 48
Satellite mode . .. .. .. . ... . ... . .... 49
Satellite station list ............. 49, 57
Static station list . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 48, 49
Radio - Tuning
Automatic seek mode (FM/AM) . .. .. . 53
Automatic station scan - SCAN (FM/AM)
54
Automatic station scan - SCAN (Sate ll ite
Radio) . . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 59
Channe l number (Satel lite Radio) .... 59
Entering a channel number (Sate ll ite
Radio) .......................... 59
Manual station selection (FM/AM) .... 52
Saving stations (FM/AM) ............ 53
Saving stations (Satellite Radio) ..... 58
Seek mode (FM/AM) .. . ... . ... . .... 53
Station scan - SCAN (FM/AM) . .. ... . . 54
Station scan - SCAN (Satellite Radio) . 59
Station select ion (Satel lite Radio) .... 58
Repeat
List/Tracks (MP3/WMA CD) . .. .. .. .. . 70
Listing/Track !Interface) .. .. .. . .. .. . 75
Repeat/mix range .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 69, 70
Repeating audio CD ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 69
 Alph a b e ti c al ind ex

Requirements for activating the speech d ia- Station select ion .. . ...... .. ....... 58 Speech d ialog system .. . ...... 162, 184
log system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Techn ical requireme nts .. .. .. .. .. . . 56 System sett ings ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 161
Reset . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. . .. 18 SCAN Te leph o ne .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 108
Resort cal l lists ..................... 110 FM/AM Radio ..................... 54 Setup - Genera l
RETURN button .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 17 Sate llite Radio .. . .......... .. .. .. . 59 Sound ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ..... 77
Route SCAN (CD) ...... .. .. .. .............. 67 Setup CD
See Nav igation - Route . ... . .. .. .. . 141 SCAN (Inte rf ace) . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . ... . 72 Close ............................ 69
See Nav igat ion - Rout e guidance . ... 123 Seat adjustment . .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. . . 158 Disp lay CD text .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ..... 70
Route guidance Seek m ode Open ... . .. .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. . .. 69
See Navigation - Route guidance .. . . 123 FM/AM radio .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 53 Repeating audio CD . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 69
Route with stopover ................. 131 Select ing Audio Source Setup Interface
Route w it hout stopover 129 CD ... . ...... .. .......... . ...... . 63 Input leve l .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . 76
Open . .. .................... .. ... 74
Selecting measurement units ......... 162
s Service in d icat o r . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . ... 158
Setup Interface Setup
Curre nt list . .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . 75
Setting the menu lan g uage ........... 161
Safety precautions Repea t cu rren t tr ack .. . ... . ... . .. .. 75
Settings
Car .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . . 158 Setup M P3
Volume ...... .. .. .. .......... 14, 121
Navigat ion . . . . . . .... .... ........ 120 Close . .. ............. . ...... .. ... 69
See also System settings (MMD ..... 161
Setup .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . . 160 List disp lay . .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . 71
Setup
Veh ic le settings .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 158 Open . .. . .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . .. 69
Bri ghtness in t he disp lay . . .. .. .. .. 164
Satellite Digital Audio Radio Service .... 56 Repea t M P3/WMA CD . . ... . ... . .. .. 70
CD ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . ... . 69
Activate your Satel lite Radio Serv ice .. 57 Track infor m at io n .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 71
Factory settings ................. . 163
Automatic stat ion scan - SCAN ...... 59 Setup Name (directory)
Function button .. .. .. .. . ...... .. . 160
Cat eg o ry f ilter . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 61 Close ............................ 89
Interface . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 74
Delete radi o presets .. . ... . .. .. .. .. 62 Open . .. ......................... 89
MP3 .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 69
Enter ing a c hannel num ber . .. .. .. .. 59 Setup Navigation .. ...... . ........... 147
Name (directory) . .......... . ... . .. 89
Satellite stati o n list . .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 49 A ltitude disp lay .................. 152
Radio - FM/AM .................... 54
Savi ng stations .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. 58 Close ........................... 147
Radio - Satellite Radio .............. 60
Setup Radio ...................... 60 Delete previous destinations ...... . 152
Safety precautions . ....... . ....... 160
Sorting stations (Sate llite Radio) . .. .. 60 Demo mode .......... .. .. .. .. .. . 153
Select ing measu rement un its .. .. .. 162
Station info ....................... 61 Enter NAV start location ........... 153
Set t i ng t he m enu la nguage .. . .. .. . 161
Station list ....................... 57 Intersection zoom ..... .. ...... .. . 149
Set t i ng t ime .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. 161
Map content . .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. . 150
Sett i ngs .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. 161

·-.,,- .. • •
• Alphab e tical ind e x

Map orientat ion . . . . . . . . . . ....... 149 Sorting stat ions {Satellite Radio) ....... 60 Select ing rad io st at ions us ing name tags
Map scheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 148 sos 170
Map view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....... 150 Emergency 911 .. .. .. .. .. .. . ...... 98 Setting basic volume .. .. .. .. .. .. . 167
Open .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 147 Sound Storing name tags . .. . ... . ... . ... . 169
Version inf o rmation . .. . ... . .. .. .. 153 Basic sound characteristics .. .. .. ... 77 Switching sources . .. ...... .. .. .. . 168
Voice guidance . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. . 151 DSP BOSE ..... .. .. .. ............. 78 System settings .................. 162
Setup Radio Vo lume settings of other functions .. 79 The Dialo g .. .. . ... . ... . ... . ... . . 166
Activate yo ur Sat el lite Radio Service . 57 What is the best way f o r the speech dialog
Speech d ialog syste m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Categ o ry f ilter {Sat ell it e Radio) . . . . . . 61 system to understand you? .. .. .. . 165
Int roducti o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Clo se .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 54 Speech d ialo g sys t em - Help f unc t ion
Setup .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. 184
Delete p revious sta t io ns {FM) . . . . . . . 56 Dialog -g u ided help f un ct ions . .. .. . 173
Speech dialog system - Examples .. . .. 180
Delete radio presets (FM/AM) . . . . . . . 56 Display indicators . .. .. . ... . ... . .. 174
Delete name tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Delete radio presets (Satellite Radio) . 62 Example system -guided help . ... . .. 173
Dial nu m ber ... . ... . ... . ... . .. . .. 180
Open .. .. .. . .......... .. .. .. ..... 54 Help CD command ............... 176
Genera l info r mation . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 180
Previous stations (FM) . . ...... .. .. . 55 Help command .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 174
Name t ag in d irec t ory .. .. .. .. .. . .. 181
Sorting stations {Satellite Radio) .... 60 Help Directory command .......... 177
Selecti ng nav igat ion dest inat ion . .. 183
Station display (FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Help MMI command . . ... .. .. . ... . 175
Using name tags fo r nav igat ion .. .. 182
Station info {Sate llite Radio) . .. .. .. . 61 Help Navigation command .. .. .. .. . 178
Using name tags to m ake a phone call
Station reception {FM/AM) . . . . . . . . . . 55 Help Radio command .. .. .. .. .. .. . 175
181
Ticker text {FM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Help Telephone command ......... 178
Speech dialog system - examples
Setup Radio (Sate llite Radio) Overv iew ........................ 173
Renaming a name tag . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Close .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ...... .. .. . 60 Request he lp .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 173
Speech d ialog syste m - General . . . . . . . 165
Open . ... . ... . ... . .. .. .. . ... . ... . 60 Syst em -guided he lp .. .. .. . .. .. .. . 173
Activating/deactivat ing . ... . .. .. .. . 166
Text s in the MM I Dis pl ay ... . ... . .. 174
Setup Telephone Adjusting the vo lume . . .. .. .. .. . .. 167
Call options . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 109 Speller ............................. 26
Deleting name tags .. ...... .. ..... 172
Close ...... . .............. . ..... 108 Deleting characters ................ 26
Entering numbers .. .. .. .. .. . ..... 172
Mailbox ..... .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. . 110 Entering cha racters/numbers ....... 26
operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Memory settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11O Overv iew ......................... 25
Reading name tags .. . ... . ... . ... . 170
Open .. .. .. .. .. . ...... .. .. .. .. .. 108 Station display (FM) .................. 55
Requirements for activating the speech
Te lephone settings ... . ... . .. . ... . 108 d ialog system . .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. 165 Sta t ion info {Sat el lite Radio) .. .. .. . .. .. 61
Shape CD .. .. .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 33 Selec ti ng CDs using name tags .. .. . 171 Station list
Sh uffl e !Interface) . . .. .. ...... .. .. . ... 72 Selecting di rectory cards using name See Radio - Station li sts .. .. .. .. .. .. 48
Shuff le {MI X ) ........................ 67 tags . ....... . ... . ....... . ..... 171 Station reception (FM/AM) . . ........... 55
 Alphabetical index

Status bar .. . ... . ... . .......... . ... . . 24 Te lephone status messages .. . ....... 113 Vo lume adjustment
Switching sources . . . ... . .. .. .. . ... . . 168 Terminal Multi-function steering wheel .. . 22, 121
System crash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Overview . ... . .. . ... . ... . .. . ... . .. 12 Muting ..... .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. . 14
System information (Satellite Radio) .. . . 62 Text display of an audio CD .. . ... . . .. .. 70 ON/OFF knob . . . ... . .. .. .. .. .. . 14, 121
System settings (MMI) Ticker text (FM) .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 55 Vo lume Navigation voice message . .. .. 121
Factory settings .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 163 Time format .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 161 Volume setting
Language (MMI) .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 161 Time setting . ... . ...... .. .. .. . ...... 161 Speech dialog syst em .. . .. .. .. .. .. 167
Measurement units . . ... . ... . .. .. . 162 Tire pressure monitoring system . ... . . 158 Vo lum e settings
Selecting date format . . ... . .. ... .. 161 Top categories . .. . . . . . .............. 137 Broadcast alert . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. 79
Selecting time format ... . ... . ... . . 161 Navigation info . .. .. .. .. .. . . .. . . . . . 79
Top dest inat ions . . ... . ... . ... . ... . .. 136
Setting date .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 161 Speech dialog system .. .. . ... . .. .. . 79
Track (CD) Next/Previous .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 67
Setting time .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 161 Te lephone volume ................. 79
Track !Interface) Forward/Reverse . . . .. .. 72
Speech d ialog system . . ... . .. .. .. . 162
System -guided help .. . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 173
Track information
Audi music interface . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 75
w
Setup MP3 . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . ... . 71 What is the best way for the speech dialog
T Track Information !Interface) .. . ... . ... . 72 system to understand you? ... . ... 165
Talk Button .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. 21 Track mix (CD) .. .. .. . . . . . ............ 67 Windows . .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. 158
Tec hni cal requirements - Sate llite Radio 56 Trailer t owing mode .... . ... . ... . ... . 158 Windshield wipers .. .. .. .. .. . ... . .... 158
Telephone
See Cell phone package . .. .. .. .. .. . 91 U
Telephone - General
USB/ mini USB adapter cable . ... . .. .. .. 39
Defau lt sett ings .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 108
Remove Bluetooth devices ... . ... . . 108 Use the iPod adapter cable to connect the
iPod .. .. .. .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 37
Settings . .. .. . ... . ... . .. .. .. .. .. 108
Setup .. .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. .. . ... . . 108
Shut down de lay . .. .. . .. .. .. .. .. . 108 V
Telephone - Memory . .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 103 Vehic le jack mode 158
Te lephone call Veh icle settings
See Call .. .. .. .. . . . .. .. .. . . . . . .... 99 See Car - General vehicle settings ... 158
Te lephone number Voice messages (navigation) . ... . .. .. . 151
Store in directory . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 107
Telephone settings .. .. .. . ... . .. .. .. . 108

·-.,,- .. • •
It has always been Audi's policy to cont inuously im prove its prod - " BOSE" is a reg istered trademar k of Bose Corporat ion.
ucts. Au di , t here f ore, reserves the rig ht t o make changes in design
Editor ial deadline : 04/ 20 / 20076
and specifications , and to make additions or improvements in its
products, without incurring any ob ligation to insta ll them on prod -
ucts pr ev iously manufactured. [i ]Tips
Text, illustrations and specifications in this book are based on the This book is only valid with the Owner 's Manual of your vehic le.
mo st up-to -da t e inf or m at io n ava ilable at th e t ime of p rin t ing .
All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in w ho le or ~ For the sake of the environment
in part without the written consent of AUDI AG. Specifications are
Printed on environmenta lly friendly paper (bleached without ch lo-
subject to change without notice .
rin e, recyclab le).
"Audi" and the four rings emblem are registered trademarks of AUD I
Pri nted in Germany
AG .
© 2007 AUDI AG
Infotainment/MM!
Bedienungsanleitung
Nordamerika
englisch 5.07
281 .562.742 .21